You are on page 1of 271

Product manual

Panel Mounted Controller

IRC5
RobotWare 5.0
Product manual
IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

M2004

Document ID: 3HAC027707-001


Revision: D
© Copyright 2007 - 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice and should not be
construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that
may appear in this manual.
Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this manual, nothing herein shall be
construed as any kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damages to persons
or property, fitness for a specific purpose or the like.
In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from
use of this manual and products described herein.
This manual and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written
permission, and contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for
any unauthorized purpose. Contravention will be prosecuted.
Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from ABB at its then current charge.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB All rights reserved.


ABB AB
Robotics Products
SE-721 68 Västerås
Sweden
Table of Contents

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Product documentation, M2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

1 Safety 11
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.2 General safety information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.2.2 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2.2.1 Safety in the robot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.2.3 Safety risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.3.1 Risks associated with live electric parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.2.4 Safety actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.4.1 Fire extinguishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2.5 Safety stops. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.2.5.1 Overview of robot stopping functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.2.5.2 What is an emergency stop? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.5.3 What is a safety stop? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.5.4 What is safeguarding? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 Safety related instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.1 Safety signals, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.2 DANGER - Make sure that the main power has been switched off! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.3.3 WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.3.4 CAUTION - Make sure that there are no loose screws or turnings inside the IRC5Panel Mounted
Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.3.5 CAUTION - Hot components in controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5 31


2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2 Installation Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2.3 Transporting and handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3.1 Unpacking, IRC5 Panel MountedController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.4 On-site Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.4.1 Installation, IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
2.5 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
© Copyright 2007 - 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

2.5.1 Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.5.2 Connecting power supply to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
2.5.3 Connecting communication cables between IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module and Control Mod-
ule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2.5.4 Connecting fan unit to IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
2.5.5 Connecting a FlexPendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.5.6 Connecting a PC to the service port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.5.7 Connection to serial channel connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.5.8 The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.5.9 Connection of external safety relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
2.5.10 Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
2.5.11 Connecting a Limit switch override push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2.6 Drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.6.1 Drive functions, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.6.2 Configuration of the drive system, IRC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
2.7 Memory functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.7.1 Memory functions, IRC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
2.7.2 Connecting a USB memory to the computer unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 3
Table of Contents

2.8 I/O system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83


2.8.1 Definition of I/O units, IRC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
2.9 Installation of add-ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.9.1 Installation of EMC shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
2.9.2 Installation of additional Drive Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2.9.3 Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
2.9.4 Installation of I/O, Gateways and encoder interface units, IRC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5 95


3.1 Maintenance schedule, controller IRC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3.2 Inspection activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.2.1 Inspection of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.3 Changing/replacing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.3.1 Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.4 Cleaning activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.4.1 Cleaning of the IRC5 controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
3.4.2 Cleaning the FlexPendant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

4 Repair activities, controller IRC5 103


4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.2 Replacement of panel board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
4.3 Replacement of power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.3.1 Replacement of control power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
4.3.2 Replacement of customer I/O power supply, IRC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
4.3.3 Replacement of drive system power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4.4 Replacement of I/O units and Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4.5 Replacement of backup energy bank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
4.6 Replacement of computer unit DSQC639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
4.7 Replacement of motherboard in computer unit DSQC639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.8 Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on motherboard in computer unit DSQC639 . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.9 Replacement of PCI boards in the computer unit DSQC639. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.10 Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
4.11 Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
4.12 Replacement of Compact Flash memory in computer unit DSQC639 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

© Copyright 2007 - 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


4.13 Replacement of servo drive units and rectifier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
4.14 Replacement of Axis computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
4.15 Replacement of Contactor Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
4.16 Replacement of drive system fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
4.17 Replacement of transformer unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4.18 Replacement of brake resistor bleeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

5 Reference information, IRC5 175


5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
5.2 Unit conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
5.3 Screw joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
5.4 Weight specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
5.5 Standard toolkit, IRC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5.6 Document references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

6 Spare Parts 183


6.1 Controller parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.1.1 IRC5Panel Mounted Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

4 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
Table of Contents

6.2 Manipulator cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188


6.2.1 Manipulator variants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.2.2 Manipulator cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.2.3 Position switch cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
6.2.4 Customer signal, CS/CP and CS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.2.5 Customer power-signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

7 Circuit Diagram 195


7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Index 197
© Copyright 2007 - 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 5
6
Table of Contents

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
© Copyright 2007 - 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
Overview

Overview

About this manual


This manual contains instructions for
• installing the controller, mechanically as well as electrically
• maintenance of the controller
• mechanical and electrical repair of the controller.

Usage
This manual should be used during
• installation and preparation work
• maintenance work
• repair work.

Who should read this manual?


This manual is intended for:
• installation personnel
• maintenance personnel
• repair personnel.

Prerequisites
A maintenance/repair/ installation craftsman working with an ABB Robot must:
• be trained by ABB and have the required knowledge of mechanical and electrical
installation/repair/maintenance work.

References

Reference Document ID
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Emergency safety information 3HAC027098-001


Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant 3HAC16590-1
Operating manual - RobotStudio 3HAC032104-001
Operating manual - Getting started, IRC5 and RobotStudio 3HAC027097-001
Operating manual - Trouble shooting 3HAC020738-001
Technical reference manual - System parameters 3HAC17076-1
Application manual - MultiMove 3HAC021272-001

Revisions

Revision Description
- First edition

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 7
Overview

Continued

Revision Description
A New option EtherNet/IP Fieldbus Adapter is described in the
new section Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer
unit DSQC 639.

Circuit diagram updated to revision 1.

Minor corrections made.


B New option PROFIBUS Fieldbus Adapter is added to section
Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC
639.

Minor corrections made.


C Updates made with IRB 360 in sections:
• Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel
Mounted Drive Module
• Configuration of the drive system, IRC5
• Manipulator cables

Changes made in section Maintenance schedule, controller


IRC5. Replacement of fans every third year is withdrawn and
inspection interval is changed from once a year to twice a year.

Minor corrections made.


D New option PROFINET Fieldbus Adapter is added to section
Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC
639.
New option PROFINET Master/Slave ,described in section
Replacement of Replacement of PCI boards in the computer
unit DSQC639
Filter time for safety stop AS/GS/SS is added in section The
MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit on page 66.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

8 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
Product documentation, M2004

Product documentation, M2004

General
The robot documentation is divided into a number of categories. This listing is based on the
type of information contained within the documents, regardless of whether the products are
standard or optional. This means that any given delivery of robot products will not contain
all documents listed, only the ones pertaining to the equipment delivered.
However, all documents listed may be ordered from ABB. The documents listed are valid for
M2004 robot systems.

Product manuals
All hardware, robots and controllers, will be delivered with a Product manual that contains:
• Safety information
• Installation and commissioning (descriptions of mechanical installation, electrical
connections)
• Maintenance (descriptions of all required preventive maintenance procedures
including intervals)
• Repair (descriptions of all recommended repair procedures including spare parts)
• Additional procedures, if any (calibration, decommissioning)
• Reference information (article numbers for documentation referred to in Product
manual, procedures, lists of tools, safety standards)
• Part list
• Foldouts or exploded views
• Circuit diagrams

Technical reference manuals


The following manuals describe the robot software in general and contain relevant reference
information:
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

• RAPID Overview: An overview of the RAPID programming language.


• RAPID Instructions, Functions and Data types: Description and syntax for all
RAPID instructions, functions and data types.
• System parameters: Description of system parameters and configuration workflows.

Application manuals
Specific applications (for example software or hardware options) are described in
Application manuals. An application manual can describe one or several applications.
An application manual generally contains information about:
• The purpose of the application (what it does and when it is useful)
• What is included (for example cables, I/O boards, RAPID instructions, system
parameters, CD with PC software)
• How to use the application
• Examples of how to use the application

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 9
Product documentation, M2004

Continued

Operating manuals
This group of manuals is aimed at those having first hand operational contact with the robot,
that is production cell operators, programmers and trouble shooters. The group of manuals
includes:
• Emergency safety information
• General safety information
• Getting started, IRC5
• IRC5 with FlexPendant
• RobotStudio
• Introduction to RAPID
• Trouble shooting, for the controller and robot

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

10 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.1. Introduction

1 Safety
1.1. Introduction

Overview
The safety information in this manual is divided in two categories:
• general safety aspects, important to attend to before performing any service or
installation work on the controller. These are applicable for all service work and are
found in section General safety information.
• specific safety information, pointed out in the procedure at the moment of the danger.
How to avoid and eliminate the danger is either detailed directly in the procedure, or
further detailed in separate instructions, found in section Safety related instructions on
page 24.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 11
1 Safety
1.2.1. Introduction

1.2 General safety information

1.2.1. Introduction

Definitions
This section details general safety information for personnel performing installation, repair
and maintenance work.

Sections
The general safety information is divided into the following sections.

Contents Containing
1. General information • safety, service
• limitation of liability
• related information
2. Safety risks (lists dangers relevant • safety risks during installation or service
when working with the controller. • risks associated with live electrical parts
The dangers are split into different
categories).
3. Safety actions (details actions • fire extinguishing
which may be taken to remedy or • safe use of the FlexPendant
avoid dangers).

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

12 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.2.2.1. Safety in the robot system

1.2.2. General Information

1.2.2.1. Safety in the robot system

Validity and responsibility


The information does not cover how to design, install and operate a complete system, nor
does it cover all peripheral equipment, which can influence the safety of the total system. To
protect personnel, the complete system must be designed and installed in accordance with the
safety requirements set forth in the standards and regulations of the country where the robot
is installed.
The users of ABB industrial robots are responsible for ensuring that the applicable safety laws
and regulations in the country concerned are observed and that the safety devices necessary
to protect people working with the robot system are designed and installed correctly.
Personnel working with robots must be familiar with the operation and handling of the
industrial robot, described in the applicable documents, for example:
• Operating Manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant (M2004)
• Product Manual

Connection of external safety devices


Apart from the built-in safety functions, the robot is also supplied with an interface for the
connection of external safety devices. Via this interface, an external safety function can
interact with other machines and peripheral equipment. This means that control signals can
act on safety signals received from the peripheral equipment as well as from the robot.

Limitation of liability
Any information given in this manual regarding safety, must not be construed as a warranty
by ABB that the industrial robot will not cause injury or damage even if all safety instructions
are complied with.

Related information
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Type of information Detailed in document Section


Installation of safety Product manual for the robot Installation and commissioning
devices
Changing operating Operating manual - IRC5 with Operating modes
modes FlexPendant
(RobotWare 5.0)
Restricting the working Product manual for the robot Installation and commissioning
space

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 13
1 Safety
1.2.3.1. Risks associated with live electric parts

1.2.3. Safety risks

1.2.3.1. Risks associated with live electric parts

Voltage related risks, general


• Although troubleshooting may, on occasion, need to be carried out while the power
supply is turned on, the robot must be turned off (by setting the mains switch to OFF)
when repairing faults, disconnecting electric leads and disconnecting or connecting
units.
• The mains supply to the robot must be connected in such a way that it can be turned
off outside the robot’s working space.

Voltage related risks, IRC5 controller


A danger of high voltage is associated with, for example, the following parts:
• Be aware of stored electrical energy (DC link, Ultracapacitor bank unit) in the
controller.
• Units such as I/O modules, can be supplied with power from an external source.
• The mains supply/mains switch
• The transformers
• The power unit
• The control power supply (230 VAC)
• The rectifier unit (400-480 VAC and 700 VDC. Note: Capacitors!)
• The drive unit (700 VDC)
• The drive system power supply (230 VAC)
• The customer power supply (230 VAC)
• The power supply unit for additional tools.
• The external voltage connected to the controller remains live even when the robot is
disconnected from the mains.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
• Additional connections.

Voltage related risks, tools, material handling devices, etc


Tools, material handling devices, etc., may be live even if the robot system is in the
OFFposition. Power supply cables which are in motion during the working process may be
damaged.

14 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.2.4.1. Fire extinguishing

1.2.4. Safety actions

1.2.4.1. Fire extinguishing

NOTE!
Use a CARBON DIOXIDE (CO2) extinguisher in the event of a fire in the robot system (robot
or controller)!
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 15
1 Safety
1.2.5.1. Overview of robot stopping functions

1.2.5. Safety stops

1.2.5.1. Overview of robot stopping functions

Overview
Stops are categorized/classified by standards IEC 60204-1:2005 and ISO 10218-1:2006.
There are several different robot stopping functions in the robot system.
• Hardware stops connected to the run chain.
• Manual stops.
• Stop with system input signals.
• Stop with RAPID instructions.
• System failure stops.

Stop modes
Stops can be in uncontrolled or controlled mode. The stop mode is configured with system
parameters, see Soft stops on page 17.

Uncontrolled stop This is related to stop category 0 as described in IEC 60204-


1:2005, which means that power is removed immediately from
the drive units, by releasing the run chain through the software
enable signal, and the brakes are activated. Also the servo
motors are used for the braking, by reversing to "generator" and
ramping down the generated power in a controlled way.
In this way, both the brakes and the motors are used to stop the
robot, giving the shortest possible stop time and stop distance.
However it also means that the robot mechanics will be highly
stressed and the robot will leave the programmed path and stop
at an uncontrolled position.
Controlled stop This is related to stop category 1 as described in IEC 60204-
1:2005.It means that the power will be connected to the drive
units for about 1 second, by a hardware delay, and the
movement will be put to a full stop using the servo motors before
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
the power is removed and the brakes are activated.
This way the robot will stop at a controlled point on or very close
to the programmed path. The controlled stop is also called "soft"
because it will be more soft for the mechanics, but note, it is the
same as a QuickStop when initiated via a system input, see
below.

Hardware stops connected to the run chain


There are several hardware stops available. All these stops are of safety category 3 as
described in EN 954-1 or EN 13849-1, that is double channel initiated stop.

Stop connections: Description:


Emergency stop Disconnects drive power in all operating modes.
Automatic mode stop Disconnects drive power in automatic operating mode. To be
used as "Protective stop" in auto.
Also called "Safety stop".
In manual mode this input connection will be inactive.

Continues on next page


16 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.2.5.1. Overview of robot stopping functions

Continued

Stop connections: Description:


General stop Disconnects drive power in all operating modes. To be used as
"Protective stop" in all operating modes.
Also called "Safety stop".
Superior stop Disconnects drive power in all operating modes. To be used as
"Protective stop" in all operating modes.
Also called "Safety stop".
Intended for external equipments.

Soft stops
The stop mode for hardware stops is configured with system parameters, one parameter for
each stop. Each of these parameters can have the value TRUE or FALSE (true or false). If
TRUE the stop will be controlled or soft, that is category 1, if FALSE it will be uncontrolled,
that is category 0, (see exception below). Default values are TRUE for SoftAS, SoftGS, and
SoftSS, and FALSE for SoftES. The parameters are of the type Safety Run Chain in the topic
Controller. The following descriptions apply if the values are set to TRUE.

Soft Stop: Description:


SoftES Soft emergency stop is activated by pressing the emergency
stop push button on the FlexPendant or the control module.
SoftES is only used in auto. In manual mode, emergency stop
will be a category 0 stop regardless if the value is TRUE or
FALSE.
SoftAS Soft automatic mode stop is intended for automatic mode during
normal program execution. This stop is activated by safety
devices such as light curtains, light beams, or sensitive mats.
SoftGS Soft general stop is activated by safety devices such as light
curtains, light beams, or sensitive mats.
SoftSS Soft superior stop has the same function as a general stop but
is intended for externally connected safety devices.

Manual stops
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

A manual stop is initiated by a person. It can be a controlled or an uncontrolled stop


depending on how the stop is initiated.

Stop mode: Manual stop: Description:


Controlled Stop button on FlexPendant This will stop program execution and
or cause an immediate stop of robot
Release of Hold-to-run button movements in all tasks.
The robots will stop in a controlled way
and on the path with no deviation. This
is called "normal progam stop".
Uncontrolled Release of enabling device This will stop program execution and
or stop all program movements.
Switching operating mode key

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 17
1 Safety
1.2.5.1. Overview of robot stopping functions

Continued

Stop with system input signals


In addition to the hardware stops as described above, it is also possible to define system input
signals, which will give an immediate or delayed stop of different modes for all tasks and
robots, when activated. Such signals are defined as system parameters of the type System
Input in the topic I/O and for the following stop modes.

Stop mode: Description:


Stop Stops the RAPID program execution. All robot movements will
be stopped on the path with no deviation. A program cannot be
started when this signal is high. This stop is similar to a normal
program stop using stop button on the FlexPendant.
QuickStop Stops the RAPID program execution quickly, like a controlled
category 1 emergency/safety stop . This stop is performed by
ramping down motion as fast as possible using optimum motor
performance. The different axes are still coordinated to trying to
keep the robot on path even if the robot may slide off with some
millimeter. Note, this kind of stop is more stressing for the
mechanics than normal stop or SoftStop.
SoftStop Stops the RAPID program execution much like an ordinary
program stop, but slightly faster. The stop is performed by
ramping down motion in a controlled and coordinated way, to
keep the robot on the programmed path with minor deviation.
This kind of stop is more "soft" to the mechanics than the
QuickStop.
Stop at End of Cycle Stops the RAPID program when the complete program is
executed, that means when the last instruction in the main
routine has been completed.
Stop at End of Program Stops program execution after the current instruction is
completed.

All of these stops are performed without using the brakes, and the power is never
disconnected. The program execution can be continued directly, for example by activating a
start signal.
NOTE!
Note, these stops shall not be used as safety stops, as they are not fulfilling safety category 3. © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Stop with RAPID instructions


There are several RAPID instructions available that stops the robot.

Instruction: Description: Arguments:


SystemStopAction Stops all robots in all tasks imme- \Stop - similar to a normal program
diately. stop with stop button.
\StopBlock - as above, but to
restart the PP has to be moved.
\Halt - this is like a category 0 stop,
i.e. it will result in motors off state,
stop of program execution and
robot movements in all motion
tasks. The Motors on button must
be pressed before the program
execution can be restarted.

Continues on next page


18 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.2.5.1. Overview of robot stopping functions

Continued

Instruction: Description: Arguments:


Stop The current move instruction will \NoRegain - the robot will not
be finished before the robot stops. return to the stop point when
A restart will continue the program restarted, e.g. after having been
execution. jogged away.
\AllMoveTasks - all robots will be
stopped
StopMove The current move instruction will \Quick - the stop will be a soft stop
be stopped immediately as a on path, as described above for
normal program stop but the system input SoftStop, otherwise
program execution will continue similar to a normal program stop.
with the next instruction. This is \AllMotionTasks - all robots will be
often used in for example trap stopped
routines.
BREAK The current move instruction and
the program execution will be
stopped immediately as a normal
program stop. A restart will
continue the program execution.
EXIT The current move instruction and
the program execution will be
stopped immediately as a normal
program stop. After stop the
Program Pointer has to be reset to
Main.
EXITCYCLE The current move instruction and
program execution will be stopped
immediately. The Program Pointer
will be reset to Main and if running
mode is continuous, the program
will be restarted.
SearchX Search instructions can be \Stop - the robot will stop as fast as
programmed with arguments to possible. This stop is performed
stop the robot movement close to by ramping down motion in each
the point where a search hit was motor separate from each other,
noticed. The program execution and as fast as possible. Since it
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

will continue with the next instruc- will be without any coordination,
tion. the robot may slide off path fairly
much. This is also called StiffStop.
\PStop - the robot will stop like
after a normal program stop.
\SStop - the robot will stop on path
but quicker than a normal program
stop. This is similar to a system
input SoftStop.

RAPID instructions are described in Technical reference manual - RAPID Instructions,


Functions and Data types.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 19
1 Safety
1.2.5.1. Overview of robot stopping functions

Continued

System failure stops

Type of stop: Description:


SysFail At system failure raising a SysFail error the robot will stop imme-
diately, with brakes being activated.
This is an uncontrolled stop category 0.
Power fail At power failure the robot will stop immediately, with brakes
being activated.
This is an uncontrolled stop category 0.
Stop at collision When a collision is detected the robot will stop immediately, with
power disconnected from the drive units and the brakes
activated.
After full stop the power is reconnected and the residual forces
are relieved by moving the robot in the reversed direction a
short distance back to its path. Then the program execution will
stop with an error message.
The robot remains in the state Motors on so that program
execution can be resumed after the collision error message has
been acknowledged.
This is an uncontrolled stop category 0.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

20 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.2.5.2. What is an emergency stop?

1.2.5.2. What is an emergency stop?

Definition of emergency stop


An emergency stop is a state that overrides any other robot control, disconnects drive power
from the robot motors, stops all moving parts, and disconnects power from any potentially
dangerous functions controlled by the robot system.
An emergency stop state means that all power is disconnected from the robot except for the
manual brake release circuits. You must perform a recovery procedure in order to return to
normal operation.
The robot system can be configured so that the emergency stop results in either:
• An uncontrolled stop, immediately stopping the robot actions by disconnecting power
from the motors.
• A controlled stop, stopping the robot actions with power available to the motors so that
the robot path can be maintained. When completed, power is disconnected.
The default setting is uncontrolled stop. However, controlled stops are preferred since they
minimize extra, unnecessary wear on the robot and the actions needed to return the robot
system back to production. Please consult your plant or cell documentation to see how your
robot system is configured.
NOTE!
The emergency stop function may only be used for the purpose and under the conditions for
which it is intended.

NOTE!
The emergency stop function is intended for immediately stopping equipment in the event of
an emergency.

NOTE!
Emergency stop should not be used for normal program stops as this causes extra,
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

unnecessary wear on the robot. How to perform normal program stops, see Stopping
programs.

Classification of stops
The safety standards that regulates automation and robot equipment defines categories in
which each type of stop applies:
If the stop is... ... then it is classified as...
uncontrolled category 0 (zero)
controlled category 1

Emergency stop devices


In a robot system there are several emergency stop devices that can be operated in order to
achieve an emergency stop. There are emergency stop buttons available on the FlexPendant
and on the controller cabinet (on the Control Module on a Dual Cabinet Controller). There
can also be other types of emergency stops on your robot, consult your plant or cell
documentation to see how your robot system is configured.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 21
1 Safety
1.2.5.3. What is a safety stop?

1.2.5.3. What is a safety stop?

Definition of safety stops


A safety stop means that only the power to the robot motors is disconnected. There is no
recovery procedure. You need only to restore motor power to recover from a safety stop.
Safety stop is also called protective stop.
The robot system can be configured so that the stop results in either:
• An uncontrolled stop, immediately stopping the robot actions by disconnecting power
from the motors.
• A controlled stop, stopping the robot actions with power available to the motors so that
the robot path can be maintained. When completed, power is disconnected.
The default setting is controlled stop.
Controlled stops are preferred since they minimize extra, unnecessary wear on the robot and
the actions needed to return the robot system back to production. Please consult your plant or
cell documentation to see how your robot system is configured.
NOTE!
The safety stop function may only be used for the purpose and under the conditions for which
it is intended.

NOTE!
Safety stop should not be used for normal program stops as this causes extra, unnecessary
wear on the robot. How to perform normal program stops, see Stopping programs.

Classification of stops
The safety standards that regulates automation and robot equipment defines categories in
which each type of stop applies:
If the stop is... ... then it is classified as...
uncontrolled category 0 (zero)

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


controlled category 1

Type of safety stops


Safety stops are activated through special signal inputs to the controller, see Product manual
- IRC5. The inputs are intended for safety devices such as cell doors, light curtains, or light
beams.

Safety stop: Description:


Automatic mode stop (AS) Disconnects drive power in automatic mode.
In manual mode this input is inactive.
General stop (GS) Disconnects drive power in all operating modes.
Superior stop (SS) Disconnects drive power in all operating modes.
Intended for external equipment.

NOTE!
Use normal program stop for all other type of stops.

22 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.2.5.4. What is safeguarding?

1.2.5.4. What is safeguarding?

Definition
Safeguarding are safety measures consisting of the use of safeguards to protect persons from
hazards which cannot reasonably be removed or sufficiently eliminated by design.
A safeguard prevents hazardous situations by stopping the robot in a controlled manner when
a certain safeguarding mechanism such as a light curtain is activated.
The safety stops described in What is a safety stop? on page 22, should be used for
safeguarding.
NOTE!
The safeguarding function may only be used for the purpose and under the conditions for
which it is intended.

NOTE!
The safeguarding should not be used for normal program stops as this causes extra,
unnecessary wear on the robot. How to perform normal program stops, see Stopping
programs.

Safeguarded space
The safeguarded space is the space guarded by the guards. For example, a robot cell is
safeguarded by the cell door and its interlocking device.

Interlocking devices
Each present guard has an interlocking device which, when activated stops the robot. The
robot cell door has an interlock that stops the robot when the door is opened. The only way
to resume operation is to close the door.

Safeguarding mechanisms
A safeguarding mechanism consists of a number of guards connected in series. When a guard
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

is activated, the chain is broken and the machine operation is stopped regardless of the state
of the guards in the rest of the chain.
NOTE!
Use normal program stop for all other type of stops.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 23
1 Safety
1.3.1. Safety signals, general

1.3 Safety related instructions

1.3.1. Safety signals, general

General
This section specifies all dangers that may arise from performing the work detailed in the
manual. Each danger is detailed in its own section consisting of:
• A caption specifying the danger level (DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION) and the
type of danger.
• A brief description of what will happen if the operator/service personnel do not
eliminate the danger.
• An instruction of how to eliminate the danger to facilitate performing the activity at
hand.

Danger levels
The table below defines the captions specifying the danger levels used throughout this
manual.

Symbol Designation Signification


DANGER Warns that an accident will occur if the instructions
are not followed, resulting in a serious or fatal injury
and/or severe damage to the product. It applies to
warnings that apply to danger with, for example,
contact with high voltage electrical units, explosion
or fire risk, risk of poisonous gases, risk of crushing,
danger impact, fall from height etc.
WARNING Warns that an accident may occur if the instructions
are not followed, that can lead to serious injury,
possibly fatal, and/or great damage to the product. It
applies to warnings that apply to danger with, for
example, contact with high voltage electrical units,
explosion or fire risk, risk of poisonous gases, risk of
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
warning crushing, impact, fall from height etc.
ELECTRICAL The electrocution or electrical shock symbol
SHOCK indicates electrical hazards which could result in
severe personal injury or death.

Electrical shock

CAUTION Warns that an accident may occur if the instructions


are not followed, that can result in injury and/or
damage to the product. It also applies to warnings of
risks that include burns, eye injury, skin injury,
hearing damage, crushing or slipping, tripping,
impact, fall from height etc. Furthermore, it applies to
caution warnings that include function requirements when
fitting and removing equipment, where there is a risk
of damaging the product or causing a breakdown.

Continues on next page


24 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.3.1. Safety signals, general

Continued

Symbol Designation Signification


ELECTROSTATIC The electrostatic discharge (ESD) symbol indicates
DISCHARGE (ESD) electrostatic hazards which could result in severe
damage to the product.

Electrostatic discharge
(ESD)

NOTE Note symbols alert you to important facts and


conditions.

Note

TIP Tip symbols direct you to specific instructions, where


to find additional information or how to perform a
certain operation in an easier way.

Tip
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 25
1 Safety
1.3.2. DANGER - Make sure that the main power has been switched off!

1.3.2. DANGER - Make sure that the main power has been switched off!

Description
Working with high voltage is potentially lethal. Persons subjected to high voltage may suffer
cardiac arrest, burn injuries, or other severe injuries. To avoid these dangers, do not proceed
working before eliminating the danger as detailed below.

Elimination, Panel Mounted Controller

Action Note/illustration
1. Switch off the main switch for the controller.

xx0600003255

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

26 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.3.3. WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD!

1.3.3. WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD!

Description
ESD (electrostatic discharge) is the transfer of electrical static charge between two bodies at
different potentials, either through direct contact or through an induced electrical field. When
handling parts or their containers, personnel not grounded may potentially transfer high static
charges. This discharge may destroy sensitive electronics.

Elimination

Action Note
1. Use a wrist strap Wrist straps must be tested frequently to ensure
that they are not damaged and are operating
correctly.
2. Use an ESD protective floor mat. The mat must be grounded through a current-
limiting resistor.
3. Use a dissipative table mat. The mat should provide a controlled discharge of
static voltages and must be grounded.

Location of wrist strap button


© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003249

A Panel Mounted Control Module


B Panel Mounted Drive Module
C Wrist strap button NOTE! When not used, the wrist strap must always be
attached to the wrist strap button.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 27
1 Safety
1.3.4. CAUTION - Make sure that there are no loose screws or turnings inside the IRC5Panel Mounted
Controller

1.3.4. CAUTION - Make sure that there are no loose screws or turnings inside the
IRC5Panel Mounted Controller

Description
To avoid damaging the product, do not proceed working before checking that there are no
loose screws, turnings or other parts inside the Control ModuleorDrive Module after that
work has been performed inside the cabinet.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

28 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
1 Safety
1.3.5. CAUTION - Hot components in controller

1.3.5. CAUTION - Hot components in controller

Description
Units and heat sinks are HOT after running the robot!
Touching the units and heat sinks may result in burns!
With higher environment temperature more surfaces on the controller get HOT and may
result in burns.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 29
1 Safety
1.3.5. CAUTION - Hot components in controller

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

30 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.1. Overview

2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5


2.1. Overview

General
The IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller is made up of the following modules:
• Control Module
• Drive Module
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003313

A Control Module
B Drive Module
C Fan unit

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 31
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.1. Overview

Continued

Control Module contains the computer unit, communication interfaces, FlexPendant


connection, service ports and also the system software which includes all basic functions for
operation and programming.
Drive Module contains the drive system.

NOTE!
When replacing a unit in the controller, report to ABB:
• the serial number
• articel number
• revision
of both the replaced unit and the replacement unit.
This is particularly important for the safety equipment to maintain the safety integrety of the
installation.

Equipment
Following parts can be delivered with the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller:

Part. no. Description Note


3HAC026292-001 Ethernet cable Standard
3HAC027818-001 Connection Power supply Standard
3HAC024322-001 Mains line filter Standard
3HAC023195-001 GTPU 2, 10m cable Option 701-1 and 701-3
3HAC11266-4 TPU cable, 30m Option 701-3
3HAC021914-001 Harness - TPU jumper plug Option 702-1
3HAC12934-1 Customer I/O power supply DSQC 608 Option 727-1
3HAC13398-2 Power supply Option 728-1
3HAC025600-005 Harness - Drive/Control 4m Option 761-1
3HAC025600-006 Harness - Drive/Control 30m Option 761-3

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


3HAC027201-001 Transfomator unit Option 881-1
3HAC027058-001 Fan unit Option 882-1
3HAC026486-001 Additional module Digital 24V Option 816-1
3HAC026486-002 Additional module Analogue/Digital Combi Option 817-2
3HAC026486-003 Additional module Digital with relays Option 818-2
3HAC1543-1 Additional unit Analogue I/O Option 819-1
3HAC1793-1 Additional unit ProfiBus Option 820-1
3HAC1789-1 Additional unit RIO Option 821-1
3HAC1792-1 Additional unit InterBus, -S Slave Option 822-1
3HAC2588-2 Additional unit Que TRack unit Option 826-1

32 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.2. Installation Activities

2.2. Installation Activities

Preconditions
The following section details the main steps on how to unload, transport, install and connect
the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller modules.

Procedure

Action Info/Illustration
1. Unpack the delivered IRC5 Panel Mounted How to unpack and transport the IRC5
Controller. controller is detailed in section Unpacking,
IRC5 Panel MountedController on page 34
2. Install the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller. How to install the IRC5 controller is
detailed in sectionInstallation, IRC5 Panel
Mounted Controller on page 36
3. Connect the manipulator to IRC5 Panel How to connect the manipulator to IRC5
MountedController. controller is detailed in section Connecting
the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel
Mounted Drive Module on page 39.
4. Connect power supply to the IRC5 Panel How to connect power supply is detailed in
MountedController. sections,
Connecting power supply to the IRC5
Panel Mounted Controller on page 53
5. Connect the FlexPendant to the IRC5 How to connect the FlexPendant is
Panel MountedController. detailed in section Connecting a
FlexPendant on page 61.
6. Miscellaneous connections. How to connect MOTORS ON/MOTORS
OFF circuits is detailed in section The
MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit on
page 66.
How to connect to an external safety relay
is detailed in Connection of external safety
relay on page 71.
How to connect buses e.g DeviceNet, is
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

detailed in the Application manual for the


bus respectively.
How to connect I/O units to the IRC5
controller is detailed in the Application
manual for the I/O unit respectively.
How to connect to a network is detailed in
section Connecting a PC to the service
port on page 62.
7. If used, install add-ons. How to install add-ons is detailed in section
Installation of add-ons on page 85

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 33
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.3.1. Unpacking, IRC5 Panel MountedController

2.3 Transporting and handling

2.3.1. Unpacking, IRC5 Panel MountedController

General
Before unpacking and installing the robot system, read the safety regulations and other
instructions very carefully. These are found in Chapter Safety.
The installation must be done by qualified installation personnel and should conform to all
national and local codes.
When unpacking the controller, check that it was not damaged during transport.
NOTE!
If the IRC5 Panel MountedController is going to be stored before unpacking and installation,
read the following information regarding storage conditions.

Storage conditions
The table below shows the recommended storage conditions for the IRC5 Panel
MountedController:

Parameter Value
Min. ambient temperature -25 C
Max. ambient temperature +55 C
Max. ambient humidity Max. 95% at constant temperature

Weight controller
The table below shows the weight for the IRC5 Panel MountedController:

Controller Weight
Panel Mounted Controller max. 40 kg
• Control Module 12 kg

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


• Drive Module 24 kg

Operating conditions
The table below shows the allowed operating conditions for the IRC5 Panel Mounted
Controller:

Parameter Value
Min. ambient temperature +5 C
Max. ambient temperature +45 C
Max. ambient humidity Max. 95%

Continues on next page


34 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.3.1. Unpacking, IRC5 Panel MountedController

Continued

Protection class
The table below shows the protection classes for the IRC5 Panel MountedController and
FlexPendant:

Equipment Protection class


IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller IP20
FlexPendant IP54
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 35
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.4.1. Installation, IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

2.4 On-site Installation

2.4.1. Installation, IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Dimensions
The illustration below shows the required installation space for the IRC5 Panel Mounted
Controller.
25
25
25
25

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


25
25

xx0600003314

Continues on next page


36 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.4.1. Installation, IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

xx0700000031

Installation conditions
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003450

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 37
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.4.1. Installation, IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

NOTE!
The Control Module and Drive Module must be mounted according to figure above.

NOTE!
Do not mount the Control Module or Drive Module on a painted surface.
The modules framing must be connected to earth.

NOTE!
The Control Module and Drive Module must be mounted and connected to the same earth.

Procedure
The following procedure details how to install the IRC5 Panel Mounted modules.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Fit the module on pre-mounted M5 screws (4 pcs).

xx0600003452

• A: M5 screws (4 pcs)
2. Secure the module with new M5 screws (4 pcs).

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003453

• B: M5 screws (4 pcs)
3. Fasten the module (M5 screw, 8 pcs) Tightening torque 4,5 Nm.

38 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

2.5 Connections

2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

General
The following section details how to connect the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel
Mounted Drive Module.

Location
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003271

A Power cable
B Signal cable

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Power cable
Signal cable
Cable clamp
Standard toolkit Described in section Standard Toolkit
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 39
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Prepare the power and signal cable


If the power and signal cables are not as open end cables they need to be prepared.
Cut the connectors and remove the outer jacket. See illustration below.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0800000080

Continues on next page


40 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Connecting the power cable


The following procedure details how to connect the manipulator power cable to the IRC5
Panel Mounted Drive Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Rout the power cable as the illustra-
tion to the right shows and fasten it
with the cable clamp.

xx0600003281

• A: cable clamp (2 pcs)


2. Connect the power cable shield.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003283

• A: shield connection

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 41
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3. Connect the power cable to the
connection block XT1 and Contactor
interface board connector
A43:XS21 and Drive Module earth
point.
NOTE! Connect earth cables in two
separate screws.

xx0600003284

xx0600003296

• A: Connection block XT1

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


• B: Contactor interface board connector
A43:XS21
• C: Drive Module EARTH point
See connection table for IRB 140 Connection
table IRB 140 on page 45 or IRB 340, 360
Connection table IRB 340, 360 on page 46 or IRB
260 Connection table IRB 1600, 260, 2400 on
page 49

Continues on next page


42 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Connecting the signal cable


The following procedure details how to connect the manipulator signal cable to the IRC5
Panel Mounted Drive Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Strip cable 18mm and shape to two pigtails.

xx0600003297

2. Attach the strain relief around the cable.

xx0600003298

3. Bend cable shielding back on outside of strain


relief.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003299

4. Mount connector and cable into the backshell.

xx0600003300

5. Assemble the other half screwing force: 100 -


120 Ncm.

xx0600003301

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 43
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6. Route the signal cable as the illustration to the
right shows and fasten it with cable straps.

xx0600003289

7. Connect the signal cable shield.

NOTE!
Your signal cable might be prepared for shield
connection. In that case the isolation is removed
at right lenght at delivery. If it is not, you need to
cut out the isolation at suitable place so that the
connection can be provided both mechanically
and electrically.

NOTE!
Unless you need additional EMC-shielding, you
do not need to make an electrical connection for
the Ethernet cable. However, the mechanical
connection must be provided, see section Instal-
lation of EMC shield on page 85.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


xx0600003288

• A: shield connection
WARNING!
Both cables are connected to the chassi. Make
sure that you have extra length so that cable
removal before opening the module will not be
necessary.

NOTE!
A tightening torque must be used at 0.5 Nm.
8. Connect the signal cable to the Axis computer See connection table for IRB 140
board connector A42.X4 Connection table IRB 140 on page 45
or IRB 340, 360 Connection table
IRB 340, 360 on page 46 or IRB 260
Connection table IRB 1600, 260,
2400 on page 49.

Continues on next page


44 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Connection table IRB 140


Power cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


30XAWG16 2XAWG10
1 BK/WH XT1:1 1
2 BK XT1:2
3 BU/BK XT1:3
4 BN/WH XT1:4
5 BN/RD XT1:5
6 BN/GN XT1:6
7 BN XT1:7
8 GN/RD XT1:8
9 GN/WH XT1:9
10 BN/BU XT1:10
11 BN/BK XT1:11
12 BU XT1:12
13 BU/GN XT1:13
14 BU/RD XT1:14
15 BU/WH XT1:15
16 BK/RD XT1:16
17 BK/GN XT1:17
18 BK/BU XT1:18
19 OG XT1:19
20 GY/BK XT1:20
21 GY/BU XT1:21
22 OG/WH XT1:22
23 OG/BU XT1:23
24 OG/BK XT1:24
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

25 OG/RD XT1:25
26 GY/GN XT1:26
27 OG/GN A43:XS21
28 GY/WH A43:XS21
29 GY A43:XS21
30 GY/RD A43:XS21
31 GN/YE Drive Module earth 2
32 GN/YE Drive Module earth

Signal cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


2X6XAWG24
Pair1 WH A42.X4:1 3
Pair1 BU A42.X4:2

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 45
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Wire no. Specification Connection point


Pair2 WH A42.X4:4
Pair2 OG A42.X4:5
Pair3 WH A42.X4:6
Pair3 GN A42.X4:7
Pair4 WH A42.X4:6
Pair4 BN A42.X4:7
Pair5 WH Isolate
Pair5 GY Isolate
Pair6 RD Isolate
Pair6 BU Isolate

Customer signal cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


Pair1 WH XT5 (CSA)
Pair1 BU XT5 (CSB)
Pair1 WH XT5 (CSC)
Pair1 OG XT5 (CSD)
Pair1 WH XT5 (CSE)
Pair1 GN XT5 (CSF)
Pair1 WH XT5 (CSG)
Pair1 BN XT5 (CSH)
Pair1 WH XT5 (CSJ)
Pair1 GY XT5 (CSK)
Pair1 RD XT5 (CSL)
Pair1 BU XT5 (CSM)

Notes:

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


1
End sleeve AWG16
2
Ring lug AWG10 M5
3
Housing D-sub 9p male, terminal male AWG24, Hood D-sub 9p shielded.

Connection table IRB 340, 360

Power cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


30XAWG16 2XAWG10
1 BU/GN XT1:1 1
2 BU/RD XT1:2
3 BU/WH XT1:3
4 BN/BU XT1:4
5 BN/BK XT1:5

Continues on next page


46 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Wire no. Specification Connection point


6 BU XT1:6
7 BK/WH XT1:7
8 BK XT1:8
9 BU/BK XT1:9
10 BK/RD XT1:10
11 BK/GN XT1:11
12 BK/BU XT1:12
13 GY XT1:13
14 BN/GN XT1:14
15 BN/RD XT1:15
16 GN/WH XT1:16
17 BN XT1:17
18 GY/BK XT1:18
19 GN/RD XT1:19
20 BN/WH XT1:20
21 GN/YE Drive Module earth 2
22 GN/YE Drive Module earth

Signal cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


2X6XAWG24
Pair1 WH A42.X4:1 3
Pair1 BU A42.X4:2
Pair2 WH A42.X4:4
Pair2 OG A42.X4:5
Pair3 WH A42.X4:6
Pair3 GN A42.X4:7
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Pair4 WH A42.X4:6
Pair4 BN A42.X4:7
Pair5 WH Isolate
Pair5 GY Isolate
Pair6 RD Isolate
Pair6 BU Isolate

Internal customer signal cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


1 RD XT5 (CPA)
2 BU XT5 (CPB)
3 GN XT5 (CPC)
4 YE XT5 (CPD)
5 WH XT5 (CPE)
6 BK XT5 (CPF)

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 47
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Wire no. Specification Connection point


7 BN XT5 (CPJ)
8 VT XT5 (CPK)
9 OG XT5 (CPL)
10 PK XT5 (CPM)
11 TQ Conductor to cut off
12 GY Conductor to cut off
Shield XT5 (0V Earth)

Wire no. Specification Connection point


Pair 1 WH XT5 (CSA)
Pair 1 BU XT5 (CSB)
Pair 2 WH XT5 (CSC)
Pair 2 OG XT5 (CSD)
Pair 3 WH XT5 (CSE)
Pair 3 GN XT5 (CSF)
Pair 4 WH XT5 (CSG)
Pair 4 BN XT5 (CSH)
Pair 5 WH XT5 (CSJ)
Pair 5 GY XT5 (CSK)
Pair 6 RD XT5 (CSL)
Pair 6 BU XT5 (CSM)
Pair 7 RD XT5 (CSN)
Pair 7 OG XT5 (CSP)
Pair 8 RD XT5 (CSR)
Pair 8 GN XT5 (CSS)
Pair 9 RD XT5 (CST)
Pair 9 BN XT5 (CSU)

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


Pair 10 RD XT5 (CSV)
Pair 10 GY XT5 (CSW)
Pair 11 BK XT5 (CSX)
Pair 11 BU XT5 (CSY)
Pair 12 BK XT5 (CSZ)
Pair 12 OG Conductor to cut off
Pair 13 BK Conductor to cut off
Pair 13 GN Conductor to cut off
Pair 14 BK Conductor to cut off
Pair 14 BN Conductor to cut off
Pair 15 BK Conductor to cut off
Pair 15 GY Conductor to cut off
Pair 16 YE Conductor to cut off
Pair 16 BU Conductor to cut off
SHIELD XT5 (0V Earth)

Continues on next page


48 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

External customer signal cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


Pair 1 WH XT5 (CSA)
Pair 1 BU XT5 (CSB)
Pair 2 WH XT5 (CSC)
Pair 2 OG XT5 (CSD)
Pair 3 WH XT5 (CSE)
Pair 3 GN XT5 (CSF)
Pair 4 WH XT5 (CSG)
Pair 4 BN XT5 (CSH)
Pair 5 WH XT5 (CSJ)
Pair 5 GY XT5 (CSK)
Pair 6 RD XT5 (CSL)
Pair 6 BU XT5 (CSM)

Notes:
1
End sleeve AWG16
2
Ring lug AWG10 M5
3
Housing D-sub 9p male, terminal male AWG24, Hood D-sub 9p shielded.

Connection table IRB 1600, 260, 2400


Power cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


30XAWG16 2XAWG10
1 BU/GN XT1:1 1
2 BU/RD XT1:2
3 BU/WH XT1:3
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

4 BN/WH XT1:4
5 BN/RD XT1:5
6 BN/GN XT1:6
7 BU XT1:7
8 BN/BK XT1:8
9 BN/BU XT1:9
10 GN/WH XT1:10
11 GN/RD XT1:11
12 BN XT1:12
13 BK/BU XT1:13
14 BK/GN XT1:14
15 BK/RD XT1:15
16 BU/BK XT1:16
17 BK XT1:17
18 BK/WH XT1:18
19 OG XT1:19
Continues on next page
3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 49
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Wire no. Specification Connection point


20 GY/BK XT1:20
21 GY/BU XT1:21
22 OG/WH XT1:22
23 OG/BU XT1:23
24 OG/BK XT1:24
25 OG/RD XT1:25
26 GY/GN XT1:26
27 OG/GN A43:XS21
28 GY/WH A43:XS21
29 GY A43:XS21
30 GY/RD A43:XS21
31 GN/YE Drive Module earth 2
32 GN/YE Drive Module earth

Signal cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


2X6XAWG24
Pair1 WH A42.X4:1 3
Pair1 BU A42.X4:2
Pair2 WH A42.X4:4
Pair2 OG A42.X4:5
Pair3 WH A42.X4:6
Pair3 GN A42.X4:7
Pair4 WH A42.X4:6
Pair4 BN A42.X4:7
Pair5 WH Isolate
Pair5 GY Isolate
Pair6 RD Isolate © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
Pair6 BU Isolate
Shield A42.X4 Shield

Continues on next page


50 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Customer cable:

Wire no. Specification Connection point


1 RD XT5 (CPA)
2 BU XT5 (CPB)
3 GN XT5 (CPC)
4 YE XT5 (CPD)
5 WH XT5 (CPE)
6 BK XT5 (CPF)
7 BN XT5 (CPJ)
8 VT XT5 (CPK)
9 OG XT5 (CPL)
10 PK XT5 (CPM)
11 TQ XT5
12 GY XT5
SHIELD XT5 (0V Earth)

Wire no. Specification Connection point


Pair 1 WH XT5 (CSA)
Pair 1 BU XT5 (CSB)
Pair 2 WH XT5 (CSC)
Pair 2 OG XT5 (CSD)
Pair 3 WH XT5 (CSE)
Pair 3 GN XT5 (CSF)
Pair 4 WH XT5 (CSG)
Pair 4 BN XT5 (CSH)
Pair 5 WH XT5 (CSJ)
Pair 5 GY XT5 (CSK)
Pair 6 RD XT5 (CSL)
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Pair 6 BU XT5 (CSM)


Pair 7 RD XT5 (CSN)
Pair 7 OG XT5 (CSP)
Pair 8 RD XT5 (CSR)
Pair 8 GN XT5 (CSS)
Pair 9 RD XT5 (CST)
Pair 9 BN XT5 (CSU)
Pair 10 RD XT5 (CSV)
Pair 10 GY XT5 (CSW)
Pair 11 BK XT5 (CSX)
Pair 11 BU XT5 (CSY)
Pair 12 WH XT5 (CSZ)
Pair 12 OG Conductor to cut off
Pair 13 BK Conductor to cut off
Pair 13 GN Conductor to cut off

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 51
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.1. Connecting the manipulator cables to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Wire no. Specification Connection point


Pair 14 BK Conductor to cut off
Pair 14 BN Conductor to cut off
Pair 15 BK Conductor to cut off
Pair 15 GY Conductor to cut off
Pair 16 YE Conductor to cut off
Pair 16 BU Conductor to cut off
SHIELD XT5 (0V Earth)

Notes:
1
End sleeve AWG16
2
Ring lug AWG10 M5
3
Housing D-sub 9p male, terminal male AWG24, Hood D-sub 9p shielded.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

52 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.2. Connecting power supply to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

2.5.2. Connecting power supply to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

General
The following section details how to connect power supply to the IRC5 Panel Mounted
Controller.

Location
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003295

A Power supply 230V 10A


B Line filter
C Incoming power 3X262V 10A

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 53
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.2. Connecting power supply to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Incoming power cable
Line filter See Miscellaneous parts on page 186.

Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section


Standard Toolkit
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Connecting incoming power 3x262V 10A to Drive Module


The following procedure details how to connect power supply to the Drive Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Place the Line filter near to the Drive
Module and it must be on the same
ground.
2. Connect 3x262V 10A to the Line filter
(LINE).

xx0600003315

3. Route, strap and connect the Line


filter (LOAD) to the contactor K42: 1,
3, 5.

Recommended tightening torque on


the contactor K42 screw terminal is
1.00 Nm
Max. tightening torque on the
contactor K42 screw terminal is 1.20
Nm.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003316

• A: incoming power 3x262V 10A wires


• B: incoming earth cable
4. Connect incoming earth cable to PE.

Continues on next page


54 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.2. Connecting power supply to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

Connecting power supply 230V 10A to Drive Module


The following procedure details how to connect power supply to the Drive Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Route the power supply 230V 10A
cable as shown in the illustration to the
right.

CAUTION!
Route and strap the power supply
230V 10A cable so it will not be
pinched by the cooling flange when
closing the front.

CAUTION! xx0600003317
Separate the power supply 230V 10A
wires from the 3x262V 10A wires.
These are disturbing on the Line filter
LOAD side.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003318

• A: incoming power 3x262V 10A


• B: power supply 230V 10A
2. Connect the power supply 230V 10A
to the Drive system power supply
connector X1.
• phase 1 to G1.X1:1
• earth to G1.X1:3
• phase 2 (N) to G1.X1:5

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 55
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.2. Connecting power supply to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

Connecting power supply 230V 10A to Control Module


The following procedure details how to connect power supply to the Control Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Route and strap the power supply 230V
10A cable as the illustration to the right
shows.

xx0600003321

• A: power supply 230V 10A


• B: incomming earth
2. Connect the power supply 230V 10A
cable to the control power supply
connector X1.
• phase 1 to G2.X1:1
• earth to G2.X1:3
• phase 2 (N) to G2.X1:5
3. Connect incomming earth to PE.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

56 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.3. Connecting communication cables between IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module and Control Module

2.5.3. Connecting communication cables between IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive


Module and Control Module

General
The following section details how to connect the communication cables between the IRC5
Panel Mounted Drive Module and Control Module.

Location
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003294

A Ethernet cable
B Panel board/Contacor interface board cable

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 57
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.3. Connecting communication cables between IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module and Control Module

Continued

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


Ethernet cable 3HAC026292-001
Panel board/Contactor interface 3HAC024201-001
board cable
Standard toolkit Described in section Standard
toolkit.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Connecting the Ethernet cable


The following procedure details how to connect the Ethernet cable between the Drive Module
and Control Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Connect the cable to the Axis computer board
connector A42.X2, route and strap the cable as
shown in the illustration above.
2. Connect the cable to the Main computer connector
A32.A9.

Connecting the Panel board/Contactor interface board cable


The following procedure details how to connect the Panel board/Contactor interface board
cable between the Drive Module and Control Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Connect the cable to the Contactor interface board
connector A43.X1, route and strap the cable as
shown in the illustration above.
2. Connect the cable to the Panel board connector
A21.X7.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

58 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.4. Connecting fan unit to IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

2.5.4. Connecting fan unit to IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

General
The following section details how to connect the fan unit to the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive
Module.

Location
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003323

A Control Module
B Drive Module
C Fan cable
D Fan unit

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 59
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.4. Connecting fan unit to IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module

Continued

Connecting fan unit to Drive Module


The following procedure details how to connect the fan unit to the Drive Module.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Connect fan unit to Drive Module
E1.XP1

xx0600003324

2.

WARNING!
The fan unit must not be covered.
Check that nothing covers or block the
fan unit.
3. Temporarily turn the power supply to
the modules on.
Inspect all fans to make sure they

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


function correctly.
Turn the power supply back off.

60 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.5. Connecting a FlexPendant

2.5.5. Connecting a FlexPendant

Location of FlexPendant connector


The FlexPendant connector is located as shown below.

xx0600003219

A FlexPendant connector

Connecting a FlexPendant

Action Info
1. Locate the FlexPendant socket connector The controller must be in manual mode.
on the controller.
2. Plug in the FlexPendant cable connector.
3. Screw the connector lock ring firmly by
turning it clockwise.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 61
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.6. Connecting a PC to the service port

2.5.6. Connecting a PC to the service port

NOTE!
The service port shall only be used for direct connection to a PC as described in this
procedure. It must not be connected to a LAN (local area network), since it has a DHCP server
that automatically distributes IP addresses to all units connected to the LAN.
Contact your network administrator if you need more information.

NOTE!
Maximum number of connected network clients using robapi are:
• LAN: 3
• Service: 1
• FlexPendant: 1

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page


62 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.6. Connecting a PC to the service port

Continued

Total max. number of applications using robapi running on the same pc connected to one
controller has no builtin maximum, however UAS limits the max number of logged on user’s
to 50.
Total max. number of concurrent connected ftp clients are 4.

Ports DSQC639
The illustration below shows the two main ports on the computer unit: the Service Port and
the LAN port. Make sure the LAN (factory network) is not connected to any of the service
ports!
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600002889

A Service port on the computer unit


B LAN port on computer unit (connects to factory LAN)

Connecting a PC to the service port

Action Illustration
1. Make sure the network setting on the PC to Refer to the system documentation for
be connected is correct. your PC, depending on the operative
system you are running.
The PC must be set to “Obtain an IP
address automatically” or set as described
in Service PC Information in the Boot
Application.
Continues on next page
3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 63
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.6. Connecting a PC to the service port

Continued

Action Illustration
2. Use the delivered category 5 Ethernet The cable is delivered in the RobotWare
crossover boot cable with RJ45 product box.
connectors.
3. Connect the boot cable to the network port
of your PC.

xx0400000844

• A: network port
The placement of the network port may
vary depending on the PC model.
4. Connect the boot cable to the service port
on the computer unit.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

64 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.7. Connection to serial channel connector

2.5.7. Connection to serial channel connector

Overview
The controller has one serial channel RS232 for permanent use which can be used for
communication point to point with printers, terminals, computers or other equipment.
The following sections detail connection to the serial channel connector (COM1) on the
computer unit.

Location DSQC639
The serial channel connector is placed on the computer unit as shown below.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600002892

Description
A COM1

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 65
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.8. The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

2.5.8. The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Outline diagram
The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit is made up of two identical chains of switches.
The diagram shows the available customer connections, AS, GS, SS and ES.
A
E

B C C
D

G F

J
&
P S
R T
K

M N

O
xx0100000174

A ES (emergency stop)
B LS (Limit switch)
C Solid state switches
D Contactor
E Mains

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


F Drive unit
G Second chain interlock
H GS (general mode safeguarded space stop)
J SS (superior stop, same function as GS)
K AS (Automatic mode safeguarded space stop)
L ED (TPU enabling device)
M Manual mode
N Automatic mode
O Operating mode selector
P RUN
R EN1
S EN2
T Motor

Continues on next page


66 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.8. The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Continued

Function of the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit


The circuit monitors all safety related equipment and switches. If any of the switches is
opened, the MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit switches the power to the motors off.
As long as the two chains not are in an identical state, the robot will remain in MOTORS OFF
mode.

Connection of safety chains


The diagram below shows the dual channel safety chain.
The supply from internal 24V and 0 V is displayed. For external supply of GS and AS check
the circuit diagram.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Te r m i n a l Lo c a t io n

X5,X6 C o n t r o l M o d u le
X22,X24 D riv e M o d u le

xx0100000166

Technical data per chain


Limit switch Load: 300 mV
Max. voltage drop: 1 V
External connectors Load: 10 mA
Max. voltage drop: 4 V
GS/AS/SS load at 24 V 25 mA
GS/AS/SS closed "1" >18 V

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 67
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.8. The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Continued

Technical data per chain


GS/AS/SS open "0" <5V
External supply of GS/AS/SS Max. + 35 VDC
Min. - 35 VDC
GS/AS/SS Filter time 2,0 ms1)
Max. potential in relation to the 300 V
cabinet earthing and other signal
groups.
Signal class Control signals

1) When connecting e.g. a Safety PLC to a safety stop, make sure that the safety check pulses
not exceeds 2,0 ms, otherwise a safety relay must be connected in between. See illustration
below.

IRC5
PLC

Panel board (A21) Safet y relay

Contact X5
X5.11 (AS1+)
X5.12 (24 V)

X5.3 (AS2-)
X5.1 (0 V)

xx0800000130

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Continues on next page


68 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.8. The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Continued

Connection of ES1/ES2 on panel unit


The diagram below shows the terminals for the emergency circuits.
The supply from internal 24V (X1/X2:10) and 0V (X1/X2:10) is displayed. For an ext.
supply, X1:3 / X2:9 is connected to ext. 24V, and X1:9 / X2:3 is connected to ext. 0V (dotted
lines).
A

24V 0V
B C D
X1:4 X1:3
X1:9

X1:10
X1:8 X1:7
X1:1

X1:2
24V

X1:6
E
24V
X1:4
X1:5
G
0V 24V
F
B C D
X2:4 X2:3
X2:9

X2:10
X2:8 X2:7

X2:1

X2:2 0V
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

X2:6
H
0V
X2:4

X2:5
J
xx0100000191

A Internal
B Ext stop
C FlexPendant
D Cabinet
E ES1 internal
F Run chain 1 top
G Internal
H ES2 internal
J Run chain 2 top
Continues on next page
3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 69
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.8. The MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit

Continued

Technical data
ES1 and ES2 max output voltage 120 VAC or 48 VDC
ES1 and ES2 max output current 120 VAC: 4 A
48 VDC L/R: 50 mA
24 VDC L/R: 2 A
24 VDC R load: 8 A
External supply of ES relay 24 VDC ± 10% between ter- minals X1:9,
8 and X2:9, 8 respectively.
Note! In case of interference, the
external supply must be properly filtered.
Rated current per chain 40 mA
Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing 300 V
and other signal groups.
Signal class Control signals

Connection to operating mode selector


The illustration below shows the connection of terminals for customer use.

xx0500002092

A Mode selector © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

External manual FS (Full Speed) 100% is an option.

Technical data
Max. voltage 48 VDC
Max. current 4A
Max. potential in relation to the cabinet earthing 300 V
and other signal groups.
Signal class Control signals

70 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.9. Connection of external safety relay

2.5.9. Connection of external safety relay

Description
The motor contactors K42 and K43 in the IRC5Panel Mounted Drive Module can operate
with external equipment if external relays are used.
The figure below shows an example of how to connect an external safety relay.

Connection example

xx0100000246

C Robot 1
D Robot 2
F ES (emergency stop) relay
G External Safety relay
H To other equipment
J Safety gate
K Cell ES (emergency stop)
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 71
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.10. Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch

2.5.10. Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch

General
This function enables you to temporarily disconnect a Drive Module and deactivate any robot
or additional mechanical units connected to this module. The procedures are detailed below.
It is also possible to connect a remote switch to enable a Drive Module Disconnect. The
required equipment and procedure for connection of a switch are specified below.
NOTE!
The system diagnostics monitors the connection and disconnection of Drive Modules, and
event log messages regarding these events will be stored in the event log when required.
These messages are accessible using the FlexPendant or RobotStudio.

Location
The contactor interface board unit is located in the Panel Mounted Drive Module as shown
below.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003241

A Contactor interface board

Required equipment
The table below details the required equipment.

Equipment Note
Wire AWG20
Switch 24V 0,5A
Operating manual - RobotStudio
Operating manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant
Standard toolkit
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Continues on next page


72 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.10. Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch

Continued

Enabling a Drive Module Disconnect in RobotStudio


The following procedures details how to enabeling the system for a Drive Module
Disconnect.

Action
1. In RobotStudio, select the Topic: Motion.
2. Select Type: Drive Module User Data .
3. Set the parameter for selected drive module to YES.
4. Restart the system.
(Warm start)

Enabling a Drive Module Disconnect with the FlexPendant


The following procedures details how to enabeling the system for a Drive Module
Disconnect.

Action
1. On the FlexPendant, Tap ABB and then Tap Control Panel.
2. In the Control panel menu, Tap Configuration.
3. In the Configuration menu, Tap Topics, and select Motion.
4. In the Topic: Motion, Tap Type: Drive Module User Data.
5. Tap selected drive module.
6. Tap the parameter in order to modify it.
7. Restart the system (warm start).

Disconnect the Drive Module


The following procedure details how to disconnect a Drive Module.

Action Note/illustration
1. Make sure that the system is in the
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

MOTORS_OFF state.
2. Disconnect the connector X22. It is also possible to use connector X21,
but this is typically used for limit switches
on the robot.

xx0600003250

Reconnect the Drive Module


The following procedure details how to reconnect the Drive Module.

Action Note/illustration
1. Make sure that the system is in the
MOTORS_OFF state.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 73
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.10. Connection of Drive Module Disconnect, by limit switch

Continued

Action Note/illustration
2. Reconnect the X22 connector.

xx0600003250

3. Move the program pointer to main in the


RAPID-program where the disconnected
mechanical units are active.

Connect a remote switch


The following procedures details how to connect a remote switch.

Action Note/illustration
1. Make sure that the system is in the
MOTORS_OFF state.
2. Disconnect the jumpers from the connector
X22.
3. Connect the wires to the connector X22
according to the diagram on the right.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0500002091

74 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.11. Connecting a Limit switch override push button

2.5.11. Connecting a Limit switch override push button

DANGER!
The Limit switch override is used to disconnect safety limitations. Make sure the Limit switch
override function is not active longer than absolutely necessary.
If the option SafeMove is implemented, Limit switch override must never be used at all. The
SafeMove safety controller has its own override function.

General
The override circuit enables the possibility to jog an axis out of a forbidden (limited) zone.

Limitations
The switch has to be placed inside the controller to eliminate the risk of electrical noise.

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no Note


Contact block 1SFA 610 605 R1001 ABB CW Control
Contact blocks with holder 1SFA 611 605 R1201 ABB CW Control
Push button 1SFA 611 102 R1105 ABB CW Control
Connector X23 1SSA 245 204 R0100 ABB CW Control
Wire Cable AWG 20 Blue
Standard toolkit Described in section,
Standard Toolkit.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on
page 195

Procedure for Panel Mounted Controller


The following procedure details how to connect a Limit switch override circuit in a Panel
Mounted Controller.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Action Note/illustration
1.

Danger

DANGER!
Before any work inside the IRC5 controller
modules, please observe the safety
information in section DANGER - Make
sure that the main power has been
switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 75
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.5.11. Connecting a Limit switch override push button

Continued

Action Note/illustration
2. Attach two additional contact blocks on the
existing push button (Motors on).

C
D
xx0500002553

• A: Additional contact blocks


• B: Existing contact, lamp blocks
• C: Holder
• D: Push button
3. Connect wires from the contact blocks to
the connector according to the diagram to
the right.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0500002556

4. Fit the connector to the X23 connector on


the contactor interface board.

xx0600003250

76 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.6.1. Drive functions, general

2.6 Drive system

2.6.1. Drive functions, general

General
The manipulator is powered by power electronics found in the IRC5 controller.

Standard configurations
The drive system (drive units and rectifier) is available in two sizes depending on which robot
to drive and other power requirements.
How to configure the drive system is detailed in, Configuration of the drive system, IRC5 on
page 78
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 77
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.6.2. Configuration of the drive system, IRC5

2.6.2. Configuration of the drive system, IRC5

General
The IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller contains a number of drive units, rectifiers and filters.
Any allowed combination of these, depending on the robot type, is specified below.
The robot system may also be equipped with up to three additional drive modules, which are
described in the Product manual - IRC5, section Installation of additional drive module.

Location
The servo drive units and rectifiers are located in the Panel Mounted Drive Module as shown
below.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


xx0600003244

A Drive system, (drive units and rectifier)

DC busbars
Between the units are fitted DC-busbars, which are specified below:

Description Art. no. Note


DC-bus bar 3HAC17281-3 DC_S2: short busbar with two connector groups

Continues on next page


78 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.6.2. Configuration of the drive system, IRC5

Continued

IRB 140
The figure below shows the drive unit positions. The table specifies which units may be fitted
in which positions.

xx0600003245

Pos. Identification Description Art. no. Note


X3 DSQC 618_RC1 Rectifier 3HAC14549-1
Z2, Y2, DSQC 617_3B3A Main Drive unit 3HAC025338-001 Z2 - X2 is ONE
X2 unit!

IRB 340, 360


The figure below shows the drive units positions. The table specifies which units may be
fitted in which positions.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003245

Pos. Identification Description Art. no. Note


X3 DSQC 618_RC1 Rectifier 3HAC14549-1
Z2, Y2, X2 DSQC 617_3E1C Main Drive unit 3HAC025338-003 Z2 - X2 is ONE
unit!

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 79
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.6.2. Configuration of the drive system, IRC5

Continued

IRB 1600, 260, 2400


The figure below shows the drive unit. The table specifies which units may be fitted in which
positions.

xx0600003245

Pos. Identification Description Art. no. Note


X3 DSQC 618_RC1 Rectifier 3HAC14549-1
Z2, Y2, X2 DSQC 617_2E2C2B Main Drive unit 3HAC025338-002 Z2 - X2 is ONE
unit!

Drive unit connection


The table below shows the drive unit connection for each drive unit.

Designation in Template file name


Main drive unit Power stage
circuit diagram (drive unit name)
DSQC 617_3B3A • B M1 (R,S,T)b M1 (DMX)c
Used for irb 140 • B M2 (R,S,T) M2 (DMX)
• A M3 (R,S,T) M3 (DMX)
• A M4 (R,S,T) M4 (DMX)
• B M5 (R,S,T) M5 (DMX)
• A M6 (R,S,T) M6 (DMX)
DSQC 617_2E2C2B • E M1 (R,S,T)b M1 (DMX)c
Used for irb 1400, 1600, 2400 • E M2 (R,S,T) M2 (DMX)
and 260 • B M3 (R,S,T) M3 (DMX) © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
• B M4 (R,S,T) M4 (DMX)
• C M5 (R,S,T) M5 (DMX)
• C M6 (R,S,T) M6 (DMX)
DSQC 617_3E1C • E M1 (R,S,T)b M1 (DMX)c
Used for irb 340, 360 • E M2 (R,S,T) M2 (DMX)
• - - -
• - - -
• E M3 (R,S,T) M5 (DMX)
• C M4 (R,S,T) M6 (DMX)

b
Phase R,S,t (U,V,W).
c
X= drive module number.

80 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.7.1. Memory functions, IRC5

2.7 Memory functions

2.7.1. Memory functions, IRC5

General
The controller may be fitted with memory functions found inside the Computer Module.
The memory functions are divided into two main categories:
• Mass memory (hard disk drive, solid state disk drive, etc)
• RAM memory (memory modules fitted on the main computer motherboard)

Computer units
Computer unit DSQC639:
• Compact flash memory 256MB containing ABB VxWorks boot image software.
• 256 MB DDR SDRAM memory (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory).

Note

NOTE!
Only use Compact flash memory and DDR SDRAM memory supplied by ABB.

Further information
The table gives references to additional information.

Information: Found in:


How to replace malfunctioning Section Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on
memory units and restore the drive motherboard in computer unit DSQC639 on page 132
system to full operation:
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 81
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.7.2. Connecting a USB memory to the computer unit

2.7.2. Connecting a USB memory to the computer unit

Location DSQC639
A USB memory may be connected to either one of the USB ports on the computer unit. The
USB ports are shown in the figure below:

xx0600002895

A USB 1, 2 The USB connectors provide two legacy USB 2.0 ports supporting High
Speed/Full Speed/Low Speed (HS/FS/LS)

Connection
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
Action Info/illustration
1. Remove the end cover on the USB memory and connect The USB memory and its
it to the connector. contents may now be
Do not disconnect the USB memory approx. 10 seconds accessed from the computer
after connecting it. unit just as any other hard
drive unit.
2.

CAUTION!

CAUTION!
Handling of USB memory is described in Operating
manual - IRC5 with FlexPendant, section File Managing.

82 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.8.1. Definition of I/O units, IRC5

2.8 I/O system

2.8.1. Definition of I/O units, IRC5

General
The IRC5 controller may be fitted with I/O, Gateway or Encoder units. These are configured
in an identical way.

xx0600003256

A I/O, Gateway or Encoder units


B Mounting rail

Standard configuration
In the standard form, no fieldbus is mounted to the controller. .
It is possible to connect any type of DeviceNet compliant I/O unit on the DeviceNet - DSQC
603 - master bus. All I/O units should comply with the DeviceNet standard and be
conformance tested by ODVA.

I/O units
The table below specifies the I/O units:

Description Note
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

AD Combi I/O DSQC 651


See I/O System parts for the spare part
number
Digital I/O DSQC 652
See I/O System parts for the spare part
number
Digital I/O with relay outputs DSQC 653
See I/O System parts for the spare part
number
Analog ±10 V I/O DSQC 355A
See I/O System parts for the spare part
number

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 83
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.8.1. Definition of I/O units, IRC5

Continued

Gateways
The table below specifies the Gateways:

Description Art. no. Note


DeviceNet/Allen Bradely Remote I/O 3HNE00025-1 DSQC 350A
Gateway
DeviceNet/Interbus Gateway 3HNE00006-1 DSQC 351A
DeviceNet/Profibus DP Gateway 3HNE00009-1 DSQC 352A

Encoder interface units


The table below specifies the encoder interface units:

Description Art. no. Note


Encoder interface unit for conveyor 3HNE01586-1 DSQC 377A.
tracking

Further information
The table below gives references to additional information:

Information: Found in:


How to install the I/O units and Section Installation of I/O, Gateways and encoder
Gateways mechanically and electri- interface units, IRC5 on page 94.
cally.
Allowed configurations of I/O units Technical reference manual - System parameters
and how to setup the configurations.
How to install the I/O unit and The Application manual for the different I/O buses
Gateways software related in a new respectively.
system.
Detailed descriptions of all available The Application manual for the different I/O buses
I/O units and Gateways. respectively.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

84 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.1. Installation of EMC shield

2.9 Installation of add-ons

2.9.1. Installation of EMC shield

General
IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller is a compact robot controller prepared for integration into
existing machines and cabinets. The EMC shielding is initially assumed to be provided by the
outer shielding provided by the system, into which the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller is
integrated. However, to increase the level of protection, the controller units are prepared for
additional shielding that ensure Class A immunity and emission according to EN55011. The
following section describes the preparation work for the additional EMC shielding.

Location
The EMC cage is installed on the IRC5 Panel Mounted Drive Module as shown in the
illustration below.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003443

A Drive Module
B EMC cage

Required equipment

Equipment Note
EMC cage
Standard toolkit The contents are described in section
Standard toolkt.
Other tools and procedures may be required. See
references to these procedures in the step-by-step
instructions below.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 85
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.1. Installation of EMC shield

Continued

Procedure
The procedure below details how to install the EMC cage on the Drive Module.

Action Info/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable shield on the
Drive Module.

NOTE!
Both signal and Ethernet cables must be in
good mechanical and electrical contact with
the specified shield plate. The signal cable
might be prepared for shield connection at
delivery but the Ethernet cable is not. In any
case make sure that the isolation is removed
at right lenght for both cables.

WARNING!
Make sure that the internal shield of the cable
is not damaged during the isolation removal.
xx0600003288

• A: shield connection

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

WARNING!
Both cables are connected to the upper plate.
Make sure that you have extra lenght so that
cable removal before opening the module will
not be necessary.

NOTE!
A tightening torque must be used at 0.5 Nm.

Continues on next page


86 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.1. Installation of EMC shield

Continued

Action Info/Illustration
3. USB cables, signal cable for the external
operator’s panel and Ethernet cables that are
connected to the main computer must be
mechanically and electrically connected to the
chassi. You need to prepare the cables by
cutting out the outer isolation at suitable
lenght.

NOTE!
A tightening torque must be used at 0.5 Nm.

WARNING!
Make sure that the internal shield of the cable
is not damaged during the isolation removal. xx0600003446

• A: shield connection
4. Fit the EMC cage on the Drive Module.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 87
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.2. Installation of additional Drive Module

2.9.2. Installation of additional Drive Module

General
To be able to use a Multi Move system or to control more than 3 additional axes, an additional
Drive Module is needed. The IRC5 controller is prepared for up to three additional Drive
Modules.

xx0600003253

Prerequisites

Equipment Note
Drive Module (Includes all cabling and required Specified in Specification Form
mounting hardware)
Ethernet board DSQC 612
See Computer unit DSQC 623 parts or
Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on page
185 for the spare part number
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section
Standard toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to
See references to these procedures in the step- the tools required.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


by-step instructions below.
Circuit Diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Procedure
The procedure below details how to install the additional drive module.

Action Info/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet,
please observe the safety
information in section DANGER -
Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


88 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.2. Installation of additional Drive Module

Continued

Action Info/Illustration
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before
handling the unit please observe the
safety information in section
WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Fit the DSQC 612 Ethernet board How to fit the Ethernet board is detailed in
into the computer unit. section Replacement of PCI boards in the
computer unit DSQC639 on page 137
4. Place the additional drive module in See Installation, IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller
position and secure it with the on page 36
included screws and washers.
5. Route and strap the cables as
shown in the illustration.

NOTE!
The attachement plates on the
cables must be connected to the
same ground point as the modules
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003393

• A: Fit to Control Module ground point


• B: Fit to Drive Module ground point
• C: Panel Board/Contactor interface board
cable
• D: Ethernet cable
6. Connect the ethernet cable
(A32.X9) to the DSQC 612 Ethernet
board.
Connector:
• A32.X9 to Ethernet board
connector, AXC1

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 89
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.2. Installation of additional Drive Module

Continued

Action Info/Illustration
7. Connect the safety signal cable
(A21.X7) to the Panel board.
Connector:
• A21.X8 - 1 additional drive
• A21.X14 - 2 additional drives
• A21.X17 - 3 additional drives

xx0600003227

8. Connect the Ethernet cable to the


Axis computer board connector
A42.X2.
9. Connect the Panel board/Contactor
interface board cable to the
Contactor interface board
connector A43.X1.
10. Strap the cabling to existing straps
inside the module.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

90 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.3. Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5

2.9.3. Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5

Location
An external operator's panel may be fitted in a separate wall cabinet as shown in the
illustration below.

xx0400000956

A Wall cabinet IRC5


B Bracket
C FlexPendant holder
D Emergency stop button
E Motor ON button
F Position mode switch
G External Operator's panel harness
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

H FlexPendant connector

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


Wall cabinet IRC5 3HAC022035-001
External Operator's panel 3HAC021273-005 30 m
cable 3HAC021273-001 22 m
3HAC021273-006 15 m
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in
section, Standard Toolkit.
Other tools and procedures These procedures include
may be required. See references to the tools
references to these required.
procedures in the step-by-
step instructions below.
Circuit Diagram See Circuit Diagram on page
195
Continues on next page
3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 91
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.3. Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5

Continued

Procedure
The procedure below details how to install the external control panel.

Action Info/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Disconnect the cable from the ethernet DSQC639:
connector for FlexPendant on the computer
unit.

xx0600002897

• A: FlexPendant port
3. Disconnect signal cabling from the panel
board unit.
Connectors:
• A21.X9
• A21.X10

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003257

Continues on next page


92 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.3. Installation of external operator's panel, IRC5

Continued

Action Info/Illustration
4. Connect the ethernet connector A32.A8 to DSQC639:
the computer unit.

xx0600002897

• A: FlexPendant port
5. Connect the signal connectors A21.X9 and
A21.X10 to the connector X9 and X10 on
the panel board unit.

xx0600003257

6. Strap the cabling to the existing cable


straping inside the module.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 93
2 Installation and Commissioning, IRC5
2.9.4. Installation of I/O, Gateways and encoder interface units, IRC5

2.9.4. Installation of I/O, Gateways and encoder interface units, IRC5

Location
The I/O units, Gateway or encoder interface units to be installed are shown in the illustration
below.

xx0600003256

A I/O units, Gateways or Encoder interface units


B Mounting rail

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


I/O units, Gateways or encoder Specified in Definition of
interface units I/O units, IRC5.
Application manual - DeviceNet 3HAC020676-001
Circuit Diagram See Circuit Diagram on
page 195

Fitting
The procedure below details how to fit the units.

Action Note/Illustration © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Fit the I/O unit by snapping it onto the
mounting rail.
3. Connect the DC supply to the board.
4. Connect wires to the inputs and output Detailed in the Application manual for the
connectors as required. respective busses.

94 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.1. Maintenance schedule, controller IRC5

3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5


3.1. Maintenance schedule, controller IRC5

General
The IRC5 robot controller must be maintained at regular intervals to ensure its function. The
maintenance activities and their respective intervals are specified below:

Intervals

Maintenance Detailed in
Equipment Interval Note!
activity section:
Complete Inspection 12 months * Inspection of the
controller modules controller on
page 96.
Drive system fans Inspection 6 months * Inspection of the
controller on
page 96.
Drive system fans Cleaning 12 months Cleaning of the
IRC5 controller
on page 99.
FlexPendant Cleaning When needed Cleaning the
FlexPendant on
page 100.

*) The time interval depends on the working environment of the equipment: a cleaner
environment may extend the maintenance interval and vice versa.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 95
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.2.1. Inspection of the controller

3.2 Inspection activities

3.2.1. Inspection of the controller

Inspection
The procedure below details how to inspect the IRC5 controller.
WARNING!
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the IRC5 controller or
units connected to the controller.
• Switch off all electric power supplies with the power switches.
• Before handling, make sure you are grounded through a special ESD wrist bracelet or
similar. Many components inside the controller modules are sensitive to ESD
(ElectroStaticDischarge) and can be destroyed if exposed to discharge. See the Safety
chapter, WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page 27.
WARNING!
Please observe the following before commencing any repair work on the IRC5 Panel
MountedController modules or units connected to the controller:
• Switch off all electric power supplies with the power switch!
• Before handling, make sure you are grounded through a special ESD wrist bracelet or
similar. Many components inside the module are sensitive to ESD (ElectroStatic
Discharge) and can be destroyed if exposed to discharge. See the Safety chapter,
WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page 27

Action Note/Illustration
1. Inspect all sealing joints and cable
glands to make sure they are airtight in
order to prevent dust and dirt from
penetrating into the cabinet andcontrol-
ler.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


2. Inspect connectors and cabling to
make sure they are securely fastened
and cabling not damaged.

Continues on next page


96 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.2.1. Inspection of the controller

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3. Inspect the drive system fans and air
channels in the controller to make sure
they are clean.

xx0600003313

• A: Control Module
• B: Drive Module
• C: Fan unit
4.

WARNING!
The fan unit must not be covered.
Check that nothing covers or block the
fan unit.
5. After cleaning:
Temporarily turn the power supply to
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

the modules on.


Inspect all fans to make sure they
function correctly.
Turn the power supply back off.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 97
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.3.1. Activities

3.3 Changing/replacing activities

3.3.1. Activities

References
Certain activities to be performed as specified in the Maintenance Schedule are not detailed
in this chapter, but in the Repairs chapter.
Please refer to the Repair chapter of the equipment in question.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

98 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.4.1. Cleaning of the IRC5 controller

3.4 Cleaning activities

3.4.1. Cleaning of the IRC5 controller

Required equipment

Equipment, etc. Note


Vacuum cleaner ESD Protected

Internal cleaning
The procedure below details how to clean the interior of thePanel Mounted Controller.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Clean the cabinet interior with a vacuum cleaner if
necessary.

Do's and don'ts!


The section below specifies some special considerations when cleaning the controller.

Always:
• use ESD Protection
• use cleaning equipment as specified above! Any other cleaning equipment may
shorten the life of signs or labels!
• check that all protective covers are fitted to the controller before cleaning!
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 99
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.4.2. Cleaning the FlexPendant

3.4.2. Cleaning the FlexPendant

Location
The surfaces to clean are shown in the illustration below.

xx0400000973

A Touch screen
B Hard buttons

Required equipment

Equipment, etc. Note


Soft cloth ESD Protected
Warm water/Mild cleaning agent

Clean the touch screen


This section details how to clean the touch screen.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


Action Info/Illustration
1. Before cleaning the screen, tap
the Lock Screen on the ABB
menu.

en0400001221

Continues on next page


100 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.4.2. Cleaning the FlexPendant

Continued

Action Info/Illustration
2. Tap the Lock button in the
following window.

en0400000657

3. When the next window appers, it is


safe to clean the screen.

en0400000658

4. Clean the touch screen and


hardware buttons using a soft
cloth and water or a mild cleaning
agent.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

5. To unlock the screen, follow the


intructions on the screen.

en0400000658

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 101
3 Maintenance activities, controller IRC5
3.4.2. Cleaning the FlexPendant

Continued

Do's and don'ts!


The section below specifies some special considerations when cleaning the FlexPendant.

Always:
• use ESD Protection
• use cleaning equipment as specified above! Any other cleaning equipment may
shorten the life time of the touch screen.
• check that all protective covers are fitted to the device before cleaning!
• make sure that no foreign objects or liquids can penetrate into the device.

Never:
• remove any covers before cleaning the FlexPendant!
• spray with a high pressure cleaner!
• clean the device, operating panel and operating elements with compressed air,
solvents, scouring agent or scrubbing sponges.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

102 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.1. Overview

4 Repair activities, controller IRC5


4.1. Overview

General
The IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller is made up of the following modules:
• Control Module
• Drive Module
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003313

A Control Module
B Drive Module
C Fan unit

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 103
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.1. Overview

Continued

Control Module contains the computer unit, communication interfaces, FlexPendant


connection, service ports and also the system software which includes all basic functions for
operation and programming.
Drive Module contains the drive system.

NOTE!
When replacing a unit in the controller, report to ABB:
• the serial number
• articel number
• revision
of both the replaced unit and the replacement unit.
This is particularly important for the safety equipment to maintain the safety integrety of the
installation.

Equipment
Following parts can be delivered with the IRC5 Panel Mounted Controller:

Part. no. Description Note


3HAC026292-001 Ethernet cable Standard
3HAC027818-001 Connection Power supply Standard
3HAC024322-001 Mains line filter Standard
3HAC023195-001 GTPU 2, 10m cable Option 701-1 and 701-3
3HAC11266-4 TPU cable, 30m Option 701-3
3HAC021914-001 Harness - TPU jumper plug Option 702-1
3HAC12934-1 Customer I/O power supply DSQC 608 Option 727-1
3HAC13398-2 Power supply Option 728-1
3HAC025600-005 Harness - Drive/Control 4m Option 761-1
3HAC025600-006 Harness - Drive/Control 30m Option 761-3

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


3HAC027201-001 Transfomator unit Option 881-1
3HAC027058-001 Fan unit Option 882-1
3HAC026486-001 Additional module Digital 24V Option 816-1
3HAC026486-002 Additional module Analogue/Digital Combi Option 817-2
3HAC026486-003 Additional module Digital with relays Option 818-2
3HAC1543-1 Additional unit Analogue I/O Option 819-1
3HAC1793-1 Additional unit ProfiBus Option 820-1
3HAC1789-1 Additional unit RIO Option 821-1
3HAC1792-1 Additional unit InterBus, -S Slave Option 822-1
3HAC2588-2 Additional unit Que TRack unit Option 826-1

104 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.2. Replacement of panel board

4.2. Replacement of panel board

Location
The panel board unit is located as shown in the illustration below.

xx0600003220

A Panel board unit

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Panel board unit DSQC643
See Control Module parts on page 183
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit!
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit Diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the panel board unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe
the safety information in section DANGER - Make
sure that the main power has been switched off! on
page 26.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 105
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.2. Replacement of panel board

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling the
unit please observe the safety information in
section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD!
on page 27
3. Disconnect all connectors.

NOTE!
Make a note of any connections.
4. Remove the lower attachment screws, and remove
the Panel Unit.

xx0600003227

• A: fixed attachments
• B: hole for attachment
screw

Refitting
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
The procedure below details how to refit the panel board unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe
the safety information in section DANGER - Make
sure that the main power has been switched off! on
page 26.

Continues on next page


106 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.2. Replacement of panel board

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling the unit
please observe the safety information in section
WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Refit the panel board unit.
4. Refit the lower attachment screws.

xx0600003227

• A: fixed attachments
• B: hole for attachment
screw
5. Reconnect all connectors.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 107


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.1. Replacement of control power supply

4.3 Replacement of power supply

4.3.1. Replacement of control power supply

Location
The control power supply is located as shown the illustration below.

xx0600003228

A Control power supply

Required equipment

Equipment Spare part no. Art. no. Note


Control Power Supply 3HAC12928-1 DSQC 604 © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
Standard toolkit The contents are
defined in section
Standard toolkit!
Other tools and These procedures
procedures may be include references to
required. See the tools required.
references to these
procedures in the step-
by-step instructions
below.
Circuit Diagram 3HAC026871-005 Complete control
system

Continues on next page


108 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.1. Replacement of control power supply

Continued

Removal
The procedures below details how to remove the control power supply.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.
2. Loosen the attachment screws and pull the
front with the Panel Board Unit in the arrow
direction.

xx0600003233

• A: attachment screws
3. Disconnect the connectors X1 - X4 on the
control power supply.
4. Loosen the attachment screw and push the
power supply up to release it from the cap nut.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003229

• A: cap nut
• B: attachment screw
5. Remove the power supply unit.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 109
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.1. Replacement of control power supply

Continued

Refitting
The procedures below details how to refit the control power supply.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe the
safety information in section DANGER - Make sure that
the main power has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Refit the control power supply by pull it down to fit the
cap nut.

xx0600003229

• A: cap nut
• B: attachment screw
3. Lock the unit in place by tighten the attachment screw.
4. Reconnect the connectors X1 - X4.
5. Refit the front with the Panel Board Unit.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

110 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.2. Replacement of customer I/O power supply, IRC5

4.3.2. Replacement of customer I/O power supply, IRC5

Location
The customer I/O power supply is shown in the illustration below.

xx0600003258

Required equipment

Equipment Spare part no. Art. no. Note


Customer I/O Power 3HAC12934-1 DSQC 608
Supply
Standard toolkit The contents are
defined in section
Standard toolkit!
Other tools and These procedures
procedures may be include references to
required. See the tools required.
references to these
procedures in the step-
by-step instructions
below.
Circuit Diagram 3HAC026871-005 Complete control
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

system

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the customer I/O power supply.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe the
safety information in section DANGER - Make sure that
the main power has been switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 111
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.2. Replacement of customer I/O power supply, IRC5

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2. Disconnect all connectors.

NOTE!
Make a note of any connec-
tions.
3. Remove the upper and lower attachment screws.

xx0400000908

• A: attachment screw
(2 pcs)
4. Remove the power supply unit.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the customer I/O power supply.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER! © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe the
safety information in section DANGER - Make sure that
the main power has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Refit the new power supply unit.

Continues on next page


112 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.2. Replacement of customer I/O power supply, IRC5

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3. Refit the attachment screws.

xx0400000908

• A: attachment screw
(2pcs)
4. Reconnect all connectors.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 113


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.3. Replacement of drive system power supply

4.3.3. Replacement of drive system power supply

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the drive system power supply in the IRC5
controller.

xx0600003239

A Drive system power supply

Required equipment

Equipment Spare part no. Art. no. Note

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


Drive system power supply 3HAC026289-001 DSQC 626A
Drive system power supply 3HAC020466-001 DSQC 627
Standard toolkit The contents are
defined in section
Standard toolkit!
Other tools and procedures These procedures
may be required. See include references
references to these to the tools
procedures in the step-by- required.
step instructions below.
Circuit Diagram 3HAC026871-005 Complete control
system

Continues on next page


114 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.3. Replacement of drive system power supply

Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the drive system power supply.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Disconnect all connectors from the unit.
A

xx0500001842

• A: drive system power supply


• B: cup nut (2 pcs)
• C: attachment screw (2 pcs)
3. Loosen the attachment screws.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

4. Pull the power supply unit to the right to


release it from the cap nuts, and remove it.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the drive system power supply.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

Danger

DANGER!
Before any repair work, please observe the
safety information in section DANGER - Make
sure that the main power has been switched
off!.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 115
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.3.3. Replacement of drive system power supply

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2. Refit the power supply by sliding the recesess
in beneath the cap nuts, and push it to the left.
A

xx0500001842

• A: drive system power supply


• B: cup nut (2 pcs)
• C: attachment screw (2 pcs)
3. Tighten the attachment screws.
4. Reconnect all connectors to the unit .

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

116 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.4. Replacement of I/O units and Gateways

4.4. Replacement of I/O units and Gateways

General
A number of I/O units and Gateways may be installed. These are specified in Definition of I/
O units, IRC5
How to configure the I/O units is detailed in Operating manual - RobotStudio.

Location
The I/O units, Gateways or encoder interface units are shown in the illustration below.

xx0600003256

A I/O units, Gateways or Encoder interface units


B Mounting rail

Required equipment

Equipment Note
A number of choices are available! Specified in section Definition of I/O units,
IRC5 on page 83.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit Diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the I/O units or Gateways.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 117
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.4. Replacement of I/O units and Gateways

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Identify the I/O unit or Gateway to be replaced.
4. Disconnect the connectors from the unit. Note which connector goes where, to
facilitate reassembly.
5. Tip the unit away from the mounting rail and
remove it.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the I/O units or Gateways.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe the
safety information in section DANGER - Make sure that
the main power has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling the unit
please observe the safety information in section
WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Hook the unit back onto the mounting rail and snap it
gently in position.
4. Reconnect all connectors disconnected during removal.

118 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.5. Replacement of backup energy bank

4.5. Replacement of backup energy bank

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the backup energy bank in the IRC5 controller.

xx0600003230

A Backup energy bank

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Backup energy bank DSQC 655
See Control Module parts on page 183.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit Diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the backup energy bank.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 119
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.5. Replacement of backup energy bank

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2. Remove the attachment screws and pull the
front with the Panel Board Unit in the arrow
direction.

xx0600003233

• A: attachment screws
3. Disconnect the connector X4 from the control
power supply.
4. Remove the attachment screw.

xx0600003231

• A: Backup energy bank


• B: connector
• C: attachment screws
5. Pull the backup energy bank out.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the backup energy bank.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Refit the new backup energy bank.

Continues on next page


120 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.5. Replacement of backup energy bank

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3. Refit the attachment screw, and tighten it.

xx0600003231

• A: Backup energy bank


• B: connector
• C: attachment screws

4. Reconnect the connector to the control


power supply connector X4.
5. Refit the front with the Panel Board Unit.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 121


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.6. Replacement of computer unit DSQC639

4.6. Replacement of computer unit DSQC639

Location
The computer unit is located as shown below.

xx0600003232

A Computer unit

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Computer unit DSQC 639
See Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on page
185. © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Continues on next page


122 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.6. Replacement of computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the computer unit.

NOTE!
The computer unit can have different design. The procedure how to remove the computer
unit is the same.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety
information in section WARNING - The unit is
sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Disconnect all connectors from the computer NOTE! Make a note of any connections.
unit.
4. Loosen the attachment screws and pull the
front with the Panel Board Unit in the arrow
direction.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003233

• A: attachment screws

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 123
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.6. Replacement of computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
5. Remove the transportation screw.

xx0600003234

• A: transportation screw
6. Push the spring lock in the arrow direction

xx0600003235

• A: Spring lock
7. Let the front end of the computer unit down
and lift the unit out.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


xx0600003236

Continues on next page


124 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.6. Replacement of computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the computer unit.

NOTE!
The computer unit can have different design. The procedure how to refit the computer unit
is the same.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet,
please observe the safety information in
section DANGER - Make sure that the
main power has been switched off! on
page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before
handling the unit please observe the
safety information in section WARNING -
The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Fit the computer unit in position
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003237

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 125
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.6. Replacement of computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4. Push the computer unit up until the spring
lock snaps into position.

xx0600003238

5. Refit the transportation screw.


6. Reconnect all connectors to the computer
unit.
7. Refit the front with the Panel Board Unit.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

126 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.7. Replacement of motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

4.7. Replacement of motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Location
The motherboard is located as shown in the figure below.

xx0600002912

A Motherboard
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Computer unit DSQC 639
See Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on page
185.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 127
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.7. Replacement of motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Removal (old design of computer unit DSQC 639)


The procedure below details how to remove the motherboard in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Remove the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122
4. Remove the five attachment screws, and
remove the cover plate.

WARNING!
Be careful with the fan cable when opening
and removing the cover plate. The fan cable
must not be stretched.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600002913

• A: attachment screw (5 pcs)


• B: fan cable
5. Disconnect the fan cable from the mother-
board.
6. Remove the Compact flash disk. Detailed in section Replacement of
Compact Flash memory in computer
unit DSQC639 on page 153.
7. Remove the PCI boards. Detailed in section Replacement of PCI
boards in the computer unit DSQC639
on page 137.

Continues on next page


128 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.7. Replacement of motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
8. Remove the ten motherboard attachment
screws

xx0600002914

• A: attachment screw (10 pcs)


Always grip the board around the edges
to avoid damage to the board or its
components!
9. Gently lift the motherboard out. Immediately put the board in an ESD
safe bag or similar.

Removal (new design of computer unit DSQC 639)


The procedure below details how to remove the motherboard in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Remove the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122
4. Remove the cover plate.
5. Disconnect the fan cable from the mother-
board.
6. Remove the fan. Detailed in section Replacement of fan
in computer unit DSQC639 on page 147
7. Remove the Compact flash disk. Detailed in section Replacement of
Compact Flash memory in computer
unit DSQC639 on page 153.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 129
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.7. Replacement of motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
8. Remove the PCI boards. Detailed in section Replacement of PCI
boards in the computer unit DSQC639
on page 137.
9. Remove the nine motherboard attachment
screws B
Loosen the motherboard from the snap-lock

xx0800000205

• A: attachment screw (9 pcs)


• B: snap-lock

Always grip the board around the edges


to avoid damage to the board or its
components!
10. Gently lift the motherboard out. Immediately put the board in an ESD
safe bag or similar.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the motherboard in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER! © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Gently lift the motherboard out of the ESD Always grip the board around the edges
safe bag and fit it into position in the computer to avoid damage to the board or its
unit. components!

Continues on next page


130 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.7. Replacement of motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
4. Secure the motherboard with its attachment
screws.
5. Refit the PCI boards. Detailed in section Replacement of PCI
boards in the computer unit DSQC639
on page 137.
6. Refit the flash disk. Detailed in section Replacement of
Compact Flash memory in computer
unit DSQC639 on page 153.
7. Reconnect the fan connector on the
motherboard and refit the coverplate.
8. Refit the computer unit. Detailed in sectionReplacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 131


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.8. Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

4.8. Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on motherboard in computer unit


DSQC639

Location
The DDR SDRAM memory is located as shown in figure below.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003031

A DDR SDRAM memory

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Computer unit DSQC639 DSQC 639
See Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on
page 185.
DDR SDRAM 256MB See Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on
page 185.

Continues on next page


132 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.8. Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Equipment Note
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to
See references to these procedures in the step- the tools required.
by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Removal (old design of the computer unit DSQC 639)


The procedure below details how to remove the DDR SDRAM memory on the motherboard
in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety
information in section WARNING - The unit is
sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Remove the computer unit Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122.
4. Remove the five attachment srews, and
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

remove the cover plate.

WARNING!
Be careful with the fan cable when opening
and removing the cover plate. The fan cable
must not be streched.

xx0600002913

• A: attachment screws (5 pcs)


• B: fan cable

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 133
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.8. Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
5. Disconnect the fan cable from the mother-
board.
6. Gently lift the DDR SDRAM memory straight
up.

xx0600003033

• A: DDR SDRAM memory


NOTE! Always grip the memory around
the edges to avoid damage to the
memory or its components!
NOTE! Immedialety put the memory in
an ESD safe bag or similar!

Removal (new design of the computer unit DSQC 639)


The procedure below details how to remove the DDR SDRAM memory on the motherboard
in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety
information in section WARNING - The unit is
sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Remove the computer unit Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122.
4. Remove the cover plate.

Continues on next page


134 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.8. Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
5. Gently lift the DDR SDRAM memory straight
up.

xx0600003033

• A: DDR SDRAM memory


NOTE! Always grip the memory around
the edges to avoid damage to the
memory or its components!
NOTE! Immedialety put the memory in
an ESD safe bag or similar!

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the DDR SDRAM memory on the motherboard in
the computer unit DSQC639.

Action Note/illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 135
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.8. Replacement of DDR SDRAM memory on motherboard in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/illustration
3. Gently lift the DDR SDRAM memory out of
the ESD safe bag and fit it into position on the
motherboard.

xx0600003033

• A: DDR SDRAM memory


NOTE! Always grip the memory around
the edges to avoid damage to the
memory or its components!
4. Reconnect the fan connector on the
motherboard and refit the coverplate.
5. Refit the computer unit. Section Replacement of computer unit
DSQC639 on page 122.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

136 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.9. Replacement of PCI boards in the computer unit DSQC639

4.9. Replacement of PCI boards in the computer unit DSQC639

Location
A number of boards may be fitted in the slots in the computer unit as shown in the figure
below:
• Ethernet card
• Profibus-DP Master/Slave
• DeviceNet Master/Slave single
• DeviceNet Master/Slave dual
• PROFINET Master/Slave
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600002915

Description
A Slot for PCI cards

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 137
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.9. Replacement of PCI boards in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


Ethernet card 3HAC15639-1 DSQC 612 Only used in
multirobot applications.
Profibus-DP Master/Slave 3HAC023047-001 DSQC 637 Profibus communi-
cation is described in "Applica-
tion manual - Profibus"
DeviceNet Master/Slave single 3HAC025779-001 DSQC 658 Devicenet commu-
nication is described in "Appli-
catiopn manual - DeviceNet"
DeviceNet Master/Slave dual 3HAC025780-001 DSQC 659 DeviceNet commu-
nication is described in "Appli-
cation manual - DeviceNet"
PROFINET Master/Slave 3HAC030327-001 DSQC 678 PROFINET com-
munication is described in
"Application manual -
PROFINET master/slave"
Standard toolkit The contents are described in
section Standard toolkit, IRC5
on page 179.
Other tools and procedures may These procedures include
be required. See references to references to tools required.
these procedures in the step-by-
step instructions below.
Application manual - Profibus 3HAC023008-001 Contains information on how to
configure the system for
Profibus cards.
Application manual - DeviceNet 3HAC020676-001 Contains information on how to
configure the system for
DeviceNet cards.
Application manual -PROFINET 3HAC031975-001 Contains information on how to
master/slave configure the system for
PROFINET master/slave card
DSQC 678.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
195.

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the PCI cards from the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe
the safety information in section DANGER - Make
sure that the main power has been switched off! on
page 26.

Continues on next page


138 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.9. Replacement of PCI boards in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling the unit
please observe the safety information in section
WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page
27
3. Remove the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement
of computer unit DSQC639 on
page 122.
4. Open the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement
of motherboard in computer unit
DSQC639 on page 127.
5. Identify the card to be replaced. The barcode sticker contains
information on type designation.
6. Disconnect any cables to/from the card Make a note of which cables are
disconnected.
7. Remove the attachment screw on top of the card
bracket.

xx0600002916

• A: attachment screws
NOTE! Always grip the card
around the edges to avoid
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

damage to the card or its


components!
8. Gently lift the card straight up. NOTE! Immediately put the card
in an ESD safe bag or similar!

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the PCI cards in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe
the safety information in section DANGER - Make
sure that the main power has been switched off! on
page 26.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 139
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.9. Replacement of PCI boards in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling the unit
please observe the safety information in section
WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page
27
3. Fit the card in position by pushing the card into the NOTE! Always grip the card
socket on the motherboard. Secure it with its around the edges to avoid
attachment screw on top of the card bracket. damage to the card or its
components!
4. Reconnect any additional cables to the card.
5. Close the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement
of motherboard in computer unit
DSQC639 on page 127.
6. Refit the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement
of computer unit DSQC639 on
page 122.
7. Make sure the robot system is configured to reflect Detailed in section Required
the PCI cards installed. equipment on page 138.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

140 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.10. Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639

4.10. Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639

Location
The following fieldbus adapter may be fitted in the compact flash slot as shown in the figure
below:
• EtherNet/IP Fieldbus Adapter
• PROFIBUS Fieldbus Adapter
• PROFINET Fieldbus Adapter
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0700000162

A Compact flash slot for fieldbus adapters

Required equipment

Equipment Art. no. Note


EtherNet/IP Fieldbus Adapter 3HAC027652-001 DSQC 669, Ethernet/IP communi-
cation is described in "Application
manual - EtherNet/IP Fieldbus
adapter"

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 141
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.10. Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Equipment Art. no. Note


PROFIBUS Fieldbus Adapter 3HAC026840-001 DSQC 667, PROFIBUS communi-
cation is described in "Application
manual - PROFIBUS Fieldbus
Adapter"
PROFINET Fieldbus Adapter 3HAC031670-001 DSQC 688, PROFINET communi-
cation is described in "Application
manual - PROFINET Fieldbus
Adapter"
Application manual - EtherNet/IP 3HAC028509-001 Contains information on how to
Fieldbus adapter configure the system for Ethernet/
IP Fieldbus Adapter DSQC 669.
Application manual - PROFIBUS 3HAC029338-001 Contains information on how to
Fieldbus Adapter configure the system for
PROFIBUS Fieldbus Adapter
DSQC 667.
Application manual - PROFINET 3HAC031974-001 Contains information on how to
Fieldbus Adapter configure the system for
PROFINET Fieldbus Adapter
DSQC 688.
Standard toolkit The contents are described in
section Standard toolkit, IRC5 on
page 179.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Removal
The following procedure details how to remove the fieldbus adapter from the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before
handling the unit please observe the safety
information in section WARNING - The unit
is sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Remove the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122
4. Open the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
motherboard in computer unit DSQC639
on page 127

Continues on next page


142 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.10. Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
5. Identify the fieldbus adapter. The barcode sticker contains information
on type designation.
6. Disconnect the cable to/from the fieldbus
adapter.
7. Loosen the attachment screws (2 psc) on
front of the fieldbus adapter to release the
fastening mechanism.

NOTE!
Only loosen the attachment screws. Do not
remove them.

xx0700000193

• A: Attachment screws (2 pcs)


© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

• B: Fastening mechanism

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 143
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.10. Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
8. Grip the loosen attachment screws and
gently pull the fieldbus adapter out in the
arrow direction.

xx0700000195

Refitting
The following procedure details how to refit the fieldbus adapter in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustrator
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet,
please observe the safety information in
section DANGER - Make sure that the
main power has been switched off! on
page 26.
2. © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before
handling the unit please observe the
safety information in section WARNING -
The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page 27

Continues on next page


144 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.10. Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustrator
3. Fit the fieldbus adapter in position by NOTE! Always grip the fieldbus adapter
pushing the fieldbus adapter along the around the edges to avoid damage to the
rails on the motherboard. adapter or its components.

WARNING!
Push carefully so no pins are damaged.
Make sure that the adapter is pushed
straight onto the rails.

xx0700000194

4. Secure it with its attachment screws (2


pcs) on front of the fieldbus adapter.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0700000201

• A: Attachment screws
• B: Fastening mechanism
5. Reconnect the cable to the fieldbus
adapter.
6. Close the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
motherboard in computer unit DSQC639 on
page 127
7. Refit the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 145
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.10. Replacement of fieldbus adapter in the computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustrator
8. Make sure the robot system is configured
to reflect the fieldbus adapter installed.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

146 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.11. Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639

4.11. Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639

Location
The computer fan is located as shown in the figure below.

xx0600002917

A Fan
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Fan See Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on page
185.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 147
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.11. Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Removal (old design of the computer unit DSQC 639)


The procedure below details how to remove the fan in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Remove the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122.
4. Open the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
motherboard in computer unit
DSQC639 on page 127.

WARNING!
Be careful with the fan cable when opening
and removing the cover plate. The fan cable
must not be stretched.
5. Disconnect the fan cable from the mother-
board.
6. Remove the attachment screw.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600002919

• A: attachment screw (1 pcs)


• B: fan cable

Continues on next page


148 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.11. Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
7. Remove the fan from the cover plate in arrow
direction.

xx0600002920

Removal (new design of the computer unit DSQC 639)


The procedure below details how to remove the fan in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling


the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Remove the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122.
4. Open the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
motherboard in computer unit
DSQC639 on page 127.
5. Disconnect the fan cable from the mother-
board.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 149
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.11. Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6. Straighten the fan plate locking device to
loosen the fan unit.
Remove the fan unit.

A
xx0800000206

• A: fan plate locking device


7. Press out the plastic rivets.
Remove the fan from the fan plate.

A
xx0800000207

• A: plastic rivet (4 pcs)

Refitting (old design of the computer unit DSQC 639) © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

The procedure below details how to refit the fan in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe
the safety information in section DANGER - Make
sure that the main power has been switched off! on
page 26.

Continues on next page


150 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.11. Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling the unit
please observe the safety information in section
WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD! on page
27
3. Refit the fan on the cover plate.
4. Refit the attachments screw.
5. Reconnect the cable to the motherboard.
6. Close the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement
of motherboard in computer unit
DSQC639 on page 127.
7. Refit the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement
of computer unit DSQC639 on
page 122.

Refitting (new design of the computer unit DSQC 639)


The procedure below details how to refit the fan in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 151
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.11. Replacement of fan in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3. Refit the fan on the fan plate.
Press in the plastic rivets to fasten the fan on
the fan plate.

A
xx0800000207

• A: plastic rivet (4 pcs)


4. Refit the fan unit in to the computer unit.
Fold the fan plate locking device to fasten the
fan unit to the computer unit.

A
xx0800000206

• A: fan plate locking device


5. Reconnect the cable to the motherboard.
6. Close the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
motherboard in computer unit
DSQC639 on page 127.
7. Refit the computer unit. Detailed in section Replacement of
computer unit DSQC639 on page 122.

152 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.12. Replacement of Compact Flash memory in computer unit DSQC639

4.12. Replacement of Compact Flash memory in computer unit DSQC639

Location
The Compact Flash memory is located in the computer unit as shown in the figure below.

xx0600002922
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

A Slot for Compact Flash memory

NOTE!
Only use Compact flash memory supplied by ABB.

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Compact Flash 256MB DSQC 656 256MB
NOTE! Only use Compact flash memory
supplied by ABB.
Includes ABB Vx-Works boot image
software to correctly reboot the robot
controller.
See Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on
page 185.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 153
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.12. Replacement of Compact Flash memory in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Equipment Note
Compact Flash 2GB DSQC 656 2GB
NOTE! Only use Compact flash memory
supplied by ABB.
Includes ABB Vx-Works boot image
software to correctly reboot the robot
controller.
See Computer unit DSQC 639 parts on
page 185.
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required.
See references to these procedures in the step-
by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the Compact Flash memory from the computer
unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Gently, pull the Compact Flash memory out in
arrow direction.

xx0600002923

Continues on next page


154 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.12. Replacement of Compact Flash memory in computer unit DSQC639

Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the Compact Flash memory in the computer unit.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety information
in section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to
ESD! on page 27
3. Refit the Compact Flash memory.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600002924

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 155


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.13. Replacement of servo drive units and rectifier

4.13. Replacement of servo drive units and rectifier

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the servo drive units and rectifier in the IRC5
controller.

xx0600003244

A Drive system (Drive units and rectifier)

Configuration
The drive module exists in a number of versions, these are described in section Configuration
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
of the drive system, IRC5 on page 78

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Drive units and rectifier Specified in section Configuration of the
drive system, IRC5 on page 78
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section
Standard toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to
See references to these procedures in the step- the tools required.
by-step instructions below.
Circuit Diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Continues on next page


156 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.13. Replacement of servo drive units and rectifier

Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the servo drive units and rectifier.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet,
please observe the safety information in
section DANGER - Make sure that the
main power has been switched off! on
page 26.
2. Loosen the attachment screws and pull
the front (axis computer/drive system
power supply unit) in the arrow direction.

xx0600003242

• A: attachment screws
3. Disconnect all connectors from the unit
to be replaced.
4. Remove the drive unit after unscrewing
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

its attachment screws .

xx0600003248

Parts:
• A: drive unit
• B: attachment screw

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 157
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.13. Replacement of servo drive units and rectifier

Continued

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the servo drive units and rectifier.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please observe the
safety information in section DANGER - Make sure that
the main power has been switched off! on page 26.
2. Fit the unit in its intended position and orientation.
Secure it with its attachment screws.
3. Reconnect any connectors disconnected at removal.
4. Refit the front (axis computer/drive system power supply
unit)

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

158 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.14. Replacement of Axis computer

4.14. Replacement of Axis computer

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the axis computer in the IRC5 controller.

xx0600003240

A Axis computer

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the axis computer.

Action Note/Illustration
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling the
unit please observe the safety information in
section WARNING - The unit is sensitive to ESD!
on page 27

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 159
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.14. Replacement of Axis computer

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
3. Disconnect all connectors from the axis NOTE!
computer. Make a note of any connections,
4. Remove the attachment screws.
A

B B

xx0500002002

• A: axis computer
• B: attachment screws
5. Remove the axis computer.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the axis computer.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


DANGER - Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


160 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.14. Replacement of Axis computer

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2. Fit the new axis computer.
A

B B

xx0500002002

• A: axis computer
• B: attachment screws
3. Refit the attachment screws.
4. Reconnect all the connectors.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 161


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.15. Replacement of Contactor Interface Board

4.15. Replacement of Contactor Interface Board

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the contactor interface board in the IRC5 Panel
Mounted Controller.

xx0600003241

A Contactor interface board

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Contactor Interface board DSQC 611

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


See Drive Module parts on page 184.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section
Standard toolkit!
Other tools and procedures may be required. See These procedures include references
references to these procedures in the step-by-step to the tools required.
instructions below.
Circuit Board See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Continues on next page


162 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.15. Replacement of Contactor Interface Board

Continued

Removal
The procedure below details how to remove the contactor board.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety
information in section WARNING - The unit
is sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Loosen the attachment screws and pull the
front (axis computer/drive system power
supply unit) in the arrow direction.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003242

• A: attachment screws
4. Disconnect all connectors. NOTE!
Make a note of any connections.
5. Refit the attachment screws.

xx0600003243

• A: contactor interface board


• B: attachment screws
Continues on next page
3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 163
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.15. Replacement of Contactor Interface Board

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
6. Remove the contactor interface board.

Refitting
The procedure below details how to refit the contactor board.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.
2.

esd

WARNING!
The unit is sensitive to ESD, before handling
the unit please observe the safety
information in section WARNING - The unit is
sensitive to ESD! on page 27
3. Refit the contactor interface board.
4. Refit the attachment screws.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003243

• A: contactor interface board


• B: attachment screws
5. Reconnect all connectors.
6. Refit the front (with axis computer/drive
system power supply unit).

164 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.16. Replacement of drive system fans

4.16. Replacement of drive system fans

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the fan unit in the IRC5 Panel Mounted
Controller.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003313

A Control Module
B Drive Module
C Fan unit

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Fan with receptacle See Miscellaneous parts on page 186.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 165
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.16. Replacement of drive system fans

Continued

Equipment Note
Other tools and procedures may be These procedures include references to the
required. see references to these tools required.
procedures in the step-by-step instructions
below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Removal
The following procedure details how to remove a fan.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Disconnect the fan cable.
2. Remove the attachment screw.

xx0600003328

• A: attachment screw
• B: fan with receptacle
3. Push the fan unit upwards and remove
it.
4. Remove attachment screws and
remove the cover from the fan.

Refitting © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


The following procedure details how to refit the drive system fan.

Action Note/Illustration
1. Refit the fan to the cover.
2. Refit the fan unit.
3. Reconnect the fan cable.

166 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.17. Replacement of transformer unit

4.17. Replacement of transformer unit

Location
The illustration below shows the transformer unit.

xx0600003259

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Transformer unit 13kVA, 6kVA, 1,8kVA
See Miscellaneous parts on page 186.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section Standard
toolkit
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Removal
The following procedures details how to remove the transformer unit.

Action Note/illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 167
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.17. Replacement of transformer unit

Continued

Action Note/illustration
2.

WARNING!
The transformer weighs between 15 and 40 kg,
use a hoist and lifting slings.
3. Disconnect the two grounding wires (gnye,
blue).
4. Disconnect the mains power supply wires,

NOTE!
Make a note of the terminal to which
each of the wires are connected. This
will facilitate reconnection to the same
terminal.
5. Remove the two transformer attachment
screws.

xx0600003260

• A: attachment screw (2pcs)


6. Lift the transformer unit out with lifting slings
and a hoist.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


Refitting
The following procedure details how to refit the transformer unit.

Action Note/illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power has
been switched off! on page 26.
2.

WARNING!
The transformer weighs between 15 and 40
kg, use a hoist and lifting slings.

Continues on next page


168 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.17. Replacement of transformer unit

Continued

Action Note/illustration
3. Fit the new transformer in place with a hoist
and lifting slings.
4. Refit the attachment screws.
5. Reconnect the mains power supply wires and
grounding wires.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 169


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.18. Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

4.18. Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

Location
The illustration below shows the location of the brake resistor bleeder in the IRC5 Panel
Mounted Controller. Note! The brake resistor bleeder is placed on the backside of the Drive
Module.

xx0600003251

A Brake resistor bleeder

Required equipment

Equipment Note
Brake resistor bleeder See Drive Module parts on page 184.
Standard toolkit The contents are defined in section
Standard toolkit
Other tools and procedures may be required. These procedures include references to the
See references to these procedures in the tools required.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
step-by-step instructions below.
Circuit diagram See Circuit Diagram on page 195.

Removal
The following procedure details how to remove the brake resistor bleeder.

Action Note/Illustration
1.

DANGER!
Before any work inside the cabinet, please
observe the safety information in section
DANGER - Make sure that the main power
has been switched off! on page 26.

Continues on next page


170 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.18. Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
2. Remove the attachment screws and pull
the front (axis computer/drive system
power supply unit) in the arrow direction.

xx0600003242

• A: attachment screws
3. Disconnect all the cables from the Drive NOTE! Make a note of any connections.
Module.
4. Remove the Drive Module.
5. Remove the Contactor interface board. See Replacement of Contactor Interface
Board on page 162
6. Disconnect the brake resistor bleeder
cables.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003291

• A: brake resistor bleeder cable

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 171
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.18. Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
7. Remove the attachment screws for the
brake resistor bleeder unit and remove the
unit.

xx0600003252

• A: attachment screws (10 pcs)

xx0600003329

8. Remove the attachment nuts.

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003330

• A: bleeder
• B: attachment nut (2 pcs)
9. Remove the bleeder.

Refitting
The following procedure details how to refit the brake resistor bleeder

Action Note/Illustration
1. Refit the bleeder and attachment nuts.
2. Refit the brake resistor bleeder unit to the Drive Module.
3. Refit the attachment screws (10 pcs)
4. Reconnect the brake resistor bleeder cables.

Continues on next page


172 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.18. Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

Continued

Action Note/Illustration
5. Refit the Contactor interface board.
6. Refit the Drive Module.
7. Reconnect all connectors and cables to the Drive
Module.
8. Refit the front (axis computer/drive system power
supply).
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 173


4 Repair activities, controller IRC5
4.18. Replacement of brake resistor bleeder

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

174 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


5 Reference information, IRC5
5.1. Introduction

5 Reference information, IRC5


5.1. Introduction

General
This chapter includes general information, complementing the more specific information in
the different procedures in the manual.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 175


5 Reference information, IRC5
5.2. Unit conversion

5.2. Unit conversion

Converter table
Use the table below to convert units used in this manual.

Quantity Units
Length 1m 3.28 ft 39.37 in
Weight 1 kg 2.21 lb
Pressure 1 bar 100 kPa 14.5 psi
Force 1N 0.738 lbf
Moment 1 Nm 0.738 lbf-tn
Volume 1L 0.264 US gal

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

176 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


5 Reference information, IRC5
5.3. Screw joints

5.3. Screw joints

General
This section details how to tighten the various types of screw joints on the controller.
The instructions and torque values are valid for screw joints comprised of metallic materials
and do not apply to soft or brittle materials.

Tightening torque
Before tightening any screw, note the following:
• Determine whether a standard tightening torque or special torque is to be applied. The
standard torques are specified in the tables below. Any special torques are specified in
the Repair, Maintenance or Installation procedure description. Any special torque
specified overrides the standard value.
• Use the correct tightening torque for each type of screw joint.
• Only use correctly calibrated torque keys.
• Always tighten the joint by hand, and never use pneumatical tools.
• Use the correct tightening technique, i.e. do not jerk. Tighten the screw in a slow,
flowing motion.
• Maximum allowed total deviation from the specified value is 10%!
The table below specify the recommended standard tightening torque for oil-lubricated
screws with slotted or cross-recess head screws.

Tightening torque (Nm)


Dimension
Class 4.8, oil-lubricated
M2.5 0.25
M3 0.5
M4 1.2
M5 2.5
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

M6 5.0

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 177


5 Reference information, IRC5
5.4. Weight specifications

5.4. Weight specifications

Definition
In all repair and maintenance instructions, weights of the components handled are sometimes
specified. All components exceeding 22 kg (50 lbs) are high-lighted in this way.
To avoid injury, ABB recommends the use of lifting equipment when handling components
with a weight exceeding 22 kg.

Example
Below is an example of how a weight specification is presented:
CAUTION!
Caution!
The transformer weighs 55 kg! All lifting equipment used must be sized accordingly!

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

178 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


5 Reference information, IRC5
5.5. Standard toolkit, IRC5

5.5. Standard toolkit, IRC5

General
All service (repair, maintenance and installation) instructions contain lists of tools required to
perform the specified activity. All special tools, i.e. all tools that are not considered standard
as defined below, are listed in their instructions respectively.
This way, the tools required are the sum of the Standard Toolkit and any tools listed in the
instruction.

Contents, standard toolkit, IRC5

Tool Remark
Screw driver, Torx Tx10
Screw driver, Torx Tx20
Screw driver, Torx Tx25
Ball tipped screw driver, Torx Tx25
Screw driver, flat blade 4 mm
Screw driver, flat blade 8 mm
Screw driver, flat blade 12 mm
Screw driver Phillips-1
Box spanner 8 mm
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 179


5 Reference information, IRC5
5.6. Document references

5.6. Document references

General
The contents of this manual may include references to additional documentation necessary to
perform certain procedures. This section specifies the article numbers for the referenced
documentaion.

Product specification, controller


The product specification includes generic technical data. The specification listed below is
the English version.

Document name Document ID


Product Specification - Controller IRC5 with FlexPendant 3HAC021785-001

Operating manuals
The operating manuals contains instructions for daily operation of robot systems. The
operating manuals listed below is the English version.

Document name Document ID Note


IRC5 with FlexPendant 3HAC16590-1
Getting started 3HAC027097-001
RobotStudio 3HAC032104-001
Trouble shooting - IRC5 3HAC020738-001

Product manual, robot


The product manuals include information about installation and service activities. The table
below specifies the article numbers of the product manuals for all robot models. The part
number -001 is the English version.

Document name Document ID


Product manual, IRB 140 3HAC023297-001 © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Product manual, IRB 140 Type C 3HAC024400-001


Product manual, IRB 1400 3HAC021111-001
Product manual, IRB 1410 3HAC026320-001
Product manual, IRB 1600 3HAC023637-001
Product manual, IRB 1600 Type A 3HAC026660-001
Product manual, IRB 2400 3HAC022031-001
Product manual, IRB 4400/4450S 3HAC022032-001
Product manual, IRB 6400RF 3HAC027076-001
Product manual, IRB 6600/6650 type A 3HAC020938-001
Product manual, IRB 6600/6650 type B 3HAC023082-001
Product manual, IRB 6650S 3HAC020993-001
Product manual, IRB 6620 3HAC027151-001
Product manual, IRB 6640 3HAC026876-001
Product manual, IRB 6660 3HAC028197-001

Continues on next page


180 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
5 Reference information, IRC5
5.6. Document references

Continued

Document name Document ID


Product manual, IRB 260 3HAC026048-001
Product manual, IRB 660 3HAC025755-001
Product manual, IRB 7600 3HAC022033-001
Product manual, IRB 340 3HAC022546-001
Product manual, IRB 360 3HAC030005-001
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 181


5 Reference information, IRC5
5.6. Document references

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

182 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


6 Spare Parts
6.1.1. IRC5Panel Mounted Controller

6 Spare Parts
6.1 Controller parts

6.1.1. IRC5Panel Mounted Controller

General
The illustrations in this section show the locations of the parts in the IRC5Panel Mounted
Controller.

Control Module parts


The illustration below shows the placement of the Control Module parts in the recommended
spare part list.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003333

Spare part no. Description Note


A 3HAC024488-001 Panel board unit DSQC 643
B 3HAC025562-001 Backup energy bank DSQC 655
C 3HAC12928-1 Control power supply DSQC 604
D 3HAC025527-001 Computer unit DSQC 639
3HAC021975-001 Harness-DSQC 604/Computer unit USB
3HAC024244-001 Ethernet cable cross conn
3HAC021377-001 Bridge connector for panel board
3HAC024000-001 Bridge connector for panel board X1
3HAC024000-002 Bridge connector for panel board X2
3HAC024000-003 Bridge connector for panel board X6
3HAC024000-004 Bridge connector for panel board X5
3HAC024323-001 Harness-DSQC 604/Comp/P.board

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 183
6 Spare Parts
6.1.1. IRC5Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

Drive Module parts


The illustration below shows the placement of the Drive Module parts in the recommended
spare part list.

C D

A B
E
xx0600003334

Spare part no. Description Note


A 3HAC026289-001 Drive system power supply DSQC 626A
3HAC020466-001 Drive system power supply ext. DSQC 627
B 3HAC024473-001 Axis computer unit DSQC 601
C 3HAC14549-1 Rectifier DSQC 618
D 3HAC025338-001 Main Servo Drive Unit, D6 3B 3A DSQC 617
D 3HAC025338-002 Main Servo Drive Unit, D6 2E 2C 2B DSQC 617 © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
D 3HAC025338-003 Main Servo Drive Unit, D4 3E 1C DSQC 617
E 3HAC13389-2 Contactor interface board DSQC 611
3HAC17281-3 DC-Bus Bar S2
3HAC026899-001 Brake resistor bleeder IRB 140, 340,
360
3HAC027027-001 Brake resistor bleeder IRB 260
3HAC026865-001 Harness-Power supply/Drive
3HAC024254-001 Ethernet cable strait con

Continues on next page


184 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
6 Spare Parts
6.1.1. IRC5Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

Computer unit DSQC 639 parts


The illustration below shows the placement of the computer unit parts in the recommended
spare part list.

C
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

xx0600003029

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 185
6 Spare Parts
6.1.1. IRC5Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

Spare part no. Description Note


A 3HAC025527-001 Computer unit DSQC 639
B 3HAC025465-001 Compact flash 256MB DSQC 656 256MB
B 3HAC025465-003 Compact flash 2GB DSQC 656 2GB
C 3HAC14944-1 RS-232/422 Converter DSQC 615
E, D, F 3HAC025779-001 DeviceNet Master/Slave Single DSQC 658
E, D, F 3HAC025780-001 DeviceNet Master/Slave Dual DSQC 659
E, D, F 3HAC15639-1 Ethernet card DSQC 612
E, D, F 3HAC11819-1 Interbus Master/Slave copper wire DSQC 529
E, D, F 3HAC5579-1 Interbus Master/Slave optical fibre DSQC 512
E, D, F 3HAC023047-001 Profibus-DP Master/Slave DSQC 637
E, D, F 3HAC030327-001 PROFINET Master/Slave DSQC 678
G 3HAC031670-001 PROFINET Fieldbus Adapter DSQC 688
I 3HAC16751-3 Fan
K 3HAC025097-016 DDR SDRAM 256MB

Miscellaneous parts
The table below details parts in the recommended spare part list.

Spare part no. Description Note


3HAC021702-001 Fans with receptacle
3HAC024322-001 Line filter
3HAC024180-001 Transformer unit 6kVA
3HAC024125-001 Harness-XP10/T1
2CDS253001R0104 3-pol automatic fuse
1SCA02235R6610 Switch
3HAC15326-3 Main switch
3HAC023195-001 GTPU 2, 10 M Cable

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


3HAC11266-4 TPU Cable, 30m
3HAC021914-001 Harness-TPU Jumper plug
3HAC12934-1 Customer I/O Power supply DSQC 608

I/O parts
The table below details parts in the recommended spare part list.

Spare part no. Description Note


3HAC025784-001 ADCombi I/O DSQC 651
3HAC025917-001 Digital I/O DSQC 652
3HAC025918-001 Digital I/O with relay outputs DSQC 653
3HNE00554-1 Analog ±10V I/O DSQC 355A

Continues on next page


186 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
6 Spare Parts
6.1.1. IRC5Panel Mounted Controller

Continued

Ext I/O parts


The table below details parts in the recommended spare part list.

Spare part no. Description Note


3HAC026486-001 Additional Module Dig 24V
3HAC026486-002 Additional Module AD Combi
3HAC026486-003 Additional Unit Digital with relays
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 187


6 Spare Parts
6.2.1. Manipulator variants

6.2 Manipulator cables

6.2.1. Manipulator variants

General
When ordering cables, consider the option numbers for the manipulators.

Manipulator Variants Option no.


IRB 140 Standard 435-2
Standard 6-0.8 435-87
High speed 435-44
High speed 6-0.8 435-87
IRB 1600 5-1.2 435-60
5-1.45 435-61
6-1.2 435-91
6-1.45 435-92
7-1.2 435-56
7-1.45 435-57
8-1.2 435-89
8-1.45 435-90
IRB 1600ID 4-1.5 435-79
IRB 2400 10kg 435-7
16kg 435-8
L 435-9
IRB 260 435-58
IRB 340 Standard 435-33
Wash down 435-34
Stainless wash down 435-35
2kg standard 435-47
2kg wash down 435-48
2kg stainless wash down 435-49

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


IRB 360 1 435-80
3 435-81
1 800 435-82
130-3.1 435-78

188 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


6 Spare Parts
6.2.2. Manipulator cables

6.2.2. Manipulator cables

Signal cables, IRB 1600

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC2493-1 Control cable signal L=7m 210-2
3HAC2530-1 Control cable signal L=15m 210-3
3HAC2540-1 Control cable signal L=22m 210-4
3HAC2566-1 Control cable signal L=30m 210-5

Signal cables, IRB 2400, IRB 260

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC7998-1 Control cable signal L=7m 210-2
3HAC7998-2 Control cable signal L=15m 210-3
3HAC7998-3 Control cable signal L=22m 210-4
3HAC7998-4 Control cable signal L=30m 210-5

Power cables, IRB 140

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC7996-1 Control cable power L=3m 210-1
3HAC7996-5 Control cable power L=7m 210-2
3HAC7996-6 Control cable power L=15m 210-3
3HAC7996-7 Control cable power L=22m 210-4
3HAC7996-8 Control cable power L=30m 210-5
3HAC7996-12 Control cable power L=7m 210-2
Open end.

Power cables, IRB 1600, IRB 2400


© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC2492-1 Control cable power L=7m Standard: 210-2 and 287-4
3HAC2529-1 Control cable power L=15m Standard: 210-3 and 287-4
3HAC2539-1 Control cable power L=22m Standard: 210-4 and 287-4
3HAC2564-1 Control cable power L=30m Standard: 210-5 and 287-4
3HAC9038-1 Control cable power L=7m Foundry: 210-2 and 287-3
Wash: 210-2 and 287-5
3HAC9038-2 Control cable power L=15m Foundry: 210-3 and 287-3
Wash: 210-3 and 287-5
3HAC9038-3 Control cable power L=22m Foundry: 210-4 and 287-3
Wash: 210-4 and 287-5
3HAC9038-4 Control cable power L=30m Foundry: 210-5 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5

Continues on next page


3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 189
6 Spare Parts
6.2.2. Manipulator cables

Continued

Power cables, IRB 260

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC9038-1 Control cable power L=7m Foundry: 210-2 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-2 Control cable power L=15m Foundry: 210-3 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-3 Control cable power L=22m Foundry: 210-4 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5
3HAC9038-4 Control cable power L=30m Foundry: 210-5 and 287-3
Wash: 210-5 and 287-5

Power cables, IRB 340

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC8158-1 Control Cable power L=7m (435-33 or 435-34 or 435-35 or
435-47 or 435-48 or 435-49)
and 210-2
3HAC027635-001 Control Cable power L=7m (435-33 or 435-34 or 435-35 or
Open end. 435-47 or 435-48 or 435-49)
and 210-2
3HAC8159-1 Control Cable power L=15m (435-33 or 435-34 or 435-35 or
435-47 or 435-48 or 435-49)
and 210-3
3HAC8160-1 Control Cable power L=22m (435-33 or 435-34 or 435-35 or
435-47 or 435-48 or 435-49)
and 210-4
3HAC8162-1 Control Cable power L=30m (435-33 or 435-34 or 435-35 or
435-47 or 435-48 or 435-49)
and 210-5

Power cables, IRB 360

Art. no. Description Option no. © Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC029903-001 Control cable, power and signal (435-803 or 435-81 or 435-82)
L=3m
3HAC029903-002 Control cable, power and signal (435-803 or 435-81 or 435-82)
L=7m
3HAC029903-003 Control cable, power and signal (435-803 or 435-81 or 435-82)
L=15m
3HAC029903-004 Control cable, power and signal (435-803 or 435-81 or 435-82)
L=22m
3HAC029903-005 Control cable, power and signal (435-803 or 435-81 or 435-82)
L=30m

190 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


6 Spare Parts
6.2.3. Position switch cables

6.2.3. Position switch cables

IRB
Axis 1

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC3363-1 Pos. switch cable L=7m 273-1
3HAC3364-1 Pos. switch cable L=15m 273-2
3HAC3365-1 Pos. switch cable L=22m 273-3
3HAC3366-1 Pos. switch cable L=30m 273-4

IRB 1600, 2400, 260


Axis 1

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC7997-1 Pos. switch cable L=7m 273-1
3HAC7997-2 Pos. switch cable L=15m 273-2
3HAC7997-3 Pos. switch cable L=22m 273-3
3HAC7997-4 Pos. switch cable L=30m 273-4
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 191


6 Spare Parts
6.2.4. Customer signal, CS/CP and CS

6.2.4. Customer signal, CS/CP and CS

IRB 1600, 2400

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC3353-1 Customer cable sign. L=7m Standard: 94-1 and 287-4
3HAC3354-1 Customer cable sign. L=15m Standard: 94-2 and 287-4
3HAC3355-1 Customer cable sign. L=22m Standard: 94-3 and 287-4
3HAC3356-14 Customer cable sign. L=30m Standard: 94-4 and 287-4
3HAC8183-1 Customer cable sign. L=7m Foundry: 94-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-2 Customer cable sign. L=15m Foundry: 94-2 and 287-3
Wash: 94-2 and 287-5
3HAC8183-3 Customer cable sign. L=22m Foundry: 94-3 and 287-3
Wash: 94-3 and 287-5
3HAC8183-4 Customer cable sign. L=30m Foundry: 94-4 and 287-3
Wash: 94-4 and 287-5

IRB 260

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC8183-1 Customer cable signal, L=7m Foundry: 94-1 and 287-3
Wash: 94-1 and 287-5
3HAC8183-2 Customer cable signal, L=15m Foundry: 94-2 and 287-3
Wash: 94-2 and 287-5
3HAC8183-3 Customer cable signal, L=22m Foundry: 94-3 and 287-3
Wash: 94-3 and 287-5
3HAC8183-4 Customer cable signal, L=30m Foundry: 94-4 and 287-3
Wash: 94-4 and 287-5

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.


IRB 340, 360

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC14860-1 Customer cable sign. L=7m 218-9 and 94-1
3HAC14860-2 Customer cable sign. L=15m 218-9 and 94-2
3HAC14860-3 Customer cable sign. L=22m 218-9 and 94-3
3HAC14860-4 Customer cable sign. L=30m 218-9 and 94-4

192 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


6 Spare Parts
6.2.5. Customer power-signal

6.2.5. Customer power-signal

IRB 340

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC3358-4 Internal Customer cable L=3m 218-5 and 94-6
3HAC3358-1 Internal Customer cable L=7m 218-5 and 94-1
3HAC3359-1 Internal Customer cable L=15m 218-5 and 94-2
3HAC3360-1 Internal Customer cable L=22m 218-5 and 94-3
3HAC3361-1 Internal Customer cable L=30m 218-5 and 94-4

IRB 360

Art. no. Description Option no.


3HAC030198-001 Internal Customer cable L=3m 218-5 and 94-6
3HAC030198-002 Internal Customer cable L=7m 218-5 and 94-1
3HAC030198-003 Internal Customer cable L=15m 218-5 and 94-2
3HAC030198-004 Internal Customer cable L=22m 218-5 and 94-3
3HAC030198-005 Internal Customer cable L=30m 218-5 and 94-4
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 193


6 Spare Parts
6.2.5. Customer power-signal

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

194 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


7 Circuit Diagram
7.1. Introduction

7 Circuit Diagram
7.1. Introduction

Definitions
This chapter specifies the circuit diagram of the IRC5 Panel MountedController.
© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 195


7 Circuit Diagram
7.1. Introduction

© Copyright 2007-2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

196 3HAC027707-001 Revision: D


The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.

Except as may be expressly stated anywhere in this document, nothing herein shall be construed as any
kind of guarantee or warranty by ABB for losses, damages to persons or property, fitness for a
specific purpose or the like.

In no event shall ABB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of this document.
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without ABB's written permission,
and contents therof must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorized purpose.
Contravention will be prosecuted.

Additional copies of this document may be obtained from ABB at its then current charge.

© Copyright 2004 ABB ALL right reserved.

ABB Automation Technologies AB


Robotics
SE-721 68 Västerås
Sweden

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CONTROLLER
COPYRIGHT page Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 1
Next 2
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Title page/cover sheet 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
Customer :
Control cabinet : IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL
Drawing number : 3HAC026871-005
Drawing version :

Manufacture :
Type :
Type of installation :
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Control cabinet :
Mains voltage :
Supply :
Control voltage :
Year of construction :

Project start :
Project manager :
Last revision :
Designed by : sejesun
Designed date : 2008-09-01
Number of pages :
:

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CONTROLLER
TITLE PAGE Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 2
Next 3
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Title page/cover sheet 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

REV 02

Page 66 Added interruptionpoints from A42-X4:6 and :7 to SMB card on all robotmodels
Page 77 Added interruptionpoints from A42-X4:6 and :7 to SMB card
Page 82 Added interruptionpoints from A42-X4:6 and :7 to SMB card
Page 87 Added interruptionpoints from A42-X4:6 and :7 to SMB card
Page 92 Added interruptionpoints from A42-X4:6 and :7 to SMB card
Page 43-47, 83, 84, 88, 93 Changed documentnumber from 3HAC024480-004 to 3HAC026871-005

REV 03
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

Page 37.1 New page, Fieldbus adapters added.


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Page 38.1 New page, ProfiNet added.


Page 80-84 Added IRB360

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + REV
REVISION INFORMATION Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 3
Next 4
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
Table of contents ABB_table_of_contents

Plant Location Page Page description Page supplementary field Date Editor
CAB CONTROLLER 1 COPYRIGHT page Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CONTROLLER 2 TITLE PAGE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB REV 3 REVISION INFORMATION Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 4 Table of contents: (1 - 39) 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 5 Table of contents: (40 - 83) 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 6 Table of contents: (84 - 93) 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 10 Device: =CAB+CM-A21 - =CAB+DM-Z1 Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 13 PLUGS OVERVIEW Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 14 PLUGS OVERVIEW Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 20 VIEW OF CONTROL MODULE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 21 VIEW OF DRIVE MODULE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 23 CONTROL MODULE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 24 BLOCK DIAGRAM Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB.PC CM 25 PROCESS POWER SUPPLY Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB.PC CM 26 OPTION : POWER SUPPLY DEVICENET Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

CAB CM 27 EMERGENCY STOP Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9


CAB CM 28 RUN CHAIN Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 29 EMERGENCY STOP Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 30 RUN CHAIN Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 31 RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING MODE SELECTOR, 2 MODES Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 32 RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING MODE SELECTOR, 2 MODES OPTION : HOT PLUG Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 33 RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING MODE SELECTOR, 3 MODES Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 34 RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING MODE SELECTOR, 3 MODES OPTION : HOT PLUG Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 35 FPU, FLEXPENDANT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 36 MAIN COMPUTER Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 37 MAIN COMPUTER Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 37.1 FIELDBUS ADAPTER:ETHERNET/IP, PROFIBUS andPROFINET I/O Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 38 PROFIBUS DP M/S Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 38.1 PROFINET Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 39 INTERBUS M/S Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CM
Table of contents: (1 - 39) Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 4
Next 5
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Table of contents 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
Table of contents ABB_table_of_contents

Plant Location Page Page description Page supplementary field Date Editor
CAB CM 40 DEVICENET SINGLE/ DUAL ADAPTER Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 41 DUAL RS232 CARD Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 42 ETHERNET CARD Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 43 DIGITAL PART OF COMBI I/O AND DIGITAL I/O UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 44 DIGITAL I/O UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 45 COMBI I/O UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 46 RELAY I/O UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 47 RELAY I/O UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 48 ANALOGUE I/O UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 49 REMOTE I/O UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 50 INTERBUS SLAVE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 51 PROFIBUS DP SLAVE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 52 ENCODER UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 60 DRIVE MODULE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 61 MAINS CONNECTION TRANSFORMER UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

CAB.PC DM 62 POWER SUPPLY Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9


CAB DM 63 CONTACTOR BOARD Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 64 POWER UNIT SERVO DISCONNECTOR Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 65 AXIS COMPUTER UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 66 AXIS COMPUTER UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 67 RECTIFIER AND BLEEDER Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 68 OPTION : FAN UNIT Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 75 IRB 140 CABINET MODULE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 76 SERVO DRIVE SYSTEM IRB 140 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 77 CONTROL CABLE IRB 140 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 78 CUSTOMER SIGNAL IRB 140 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 80 IRB 340 AND IRB 360CABINET MODULE Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB DM 81 SERVO DRIVE UNITS IRB 340 AND IRB 360 Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB DM 82 CONTROL CABLE IRB 340 AND IRB 360 Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 83 CUSTOMER SIGNAL IRB 340 AND IRB 360 Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CM
Table of contents: (40 - 83) Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 5
Next 6
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Table of contents 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
Table of contents ABB_table_of_contents

Plant Location Page Page description Page supplementary field Date Editor
CAB CM 84 CUSTOMER SIGNAL IRB 340 AND IRB 360 Approved 2008-08-28 sejesun
CAB CM 85 IRB 1600 CABINET MODULE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 86 SERVO DRIVE UNIT IRB 1600 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 87 CONTROL CABLE IRB 1600 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 88 CUSTOMER POWER/SIGNAL IRB 1600 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 90 IRB 2400 CABINET MODULE Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 91 SERVO DRIVE UNIT IRB 2400 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB DM 92 CONTROL CABLE IRB 2400 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
CAB CM 93 CUSTOMER POWER/SIGNAL IRB 2400 Approved 2007-03-26 setonil9
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CM
Table of contents: (84 - 93) Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 6
Next 10
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Table of contents 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
Location name Location description Page Location name Location description Page
=CAB+CM- -A21 PANEL BOARD 27 =CAB+CM- -I/Ox PROFIBUS DP SLAVE 51
=CAB+EXT- -A21 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 31 =CAB+CM- -I/Ox ENCODER UNIT 52
=CAB+EXT- -A21 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 32 =CAB+DM- -K42 MOTORS ON CONTACTOR 1 64
=CAB+EXT- -A21 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 33 =CAB+DM- -K43 MOTORS ON CONTACTOR 2 64
=CAB+EXT- -A21 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 34 =CAB+DM- -K44 BRAKE CONTACTOR 64
=CAB+EXT-A21 -A22 ADAPTER 31 =CAB+CM-A33.1 -LAN1 PROFINET LAN1
=CAB+EXT-A21 -A22 ADAPTER 32 =CAB+DM- -Q1 OPTION : MAINS SWITCH 61
=CAB+EXT-A21 -A22 ADAPTER 33 =CAB+DM- -R1.1 BLEEDER 67
=CAB+EXT-A21 -A22 ADAPTER 34 =CAB+DM- -R1.2 BLEEDER 67
=CAB+CM- -A33 PROFIBUS DP M/S 38 =CAB+CM- -R3 120 ohm 43
=CAB+CM- -A33.1 PROFINET DSQC678 38.1 =CAB+CM- -R5 120 ohm 46
=CAB+CM- -A34 DUAL RS232 CARD 41 =CAB+CM- -R8 120 ohm 50
=CAB+CM- -A35 DEVICE NET ADAPTER 40 =CAB+CM- -R9 120 ohm 51
=CAB+CM- -A36 ETHERNET CARD 42 =CAB+EXT- -S21.1 2-MODE SELECTOR 31
=CAB+CM- -A37 INTERBUS M/S (OPTICAL FIBRE) 39 =CAB+EXT- -S21.1 2-MODE SELECTOR 32
=CAB+CM- -A37 INTERBUS M/S (COPPER WIRE) 39 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.1 3-MODE SELECTOR 33
=CAB+CM- -A38.1 ETHERNET/IP Fieldbus adapter DSQC 669 37.1 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.1 3-MODE SELECTOR 34
=CAB+CM- -A38.2 PROFIBUS Fieldbus adapter DSQC 667 37.1 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.2 MOTOR ON PB 31
=CAB+CM- -A38.3 PROFINET I/O Fieldbus adapter DSQC 688 37.1 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.2 MOTOR ON PB 32
=CAB+CM- -A39 OPTION:232/422/485 SERIE CONVERTER 37 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.2 MOTOR ON PB 33
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

=CAB+DM- -A41.1 MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT 65 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.2 MOTOR ON PB 34


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

=CAB+DM- -A41.1 MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT 76 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.3 EMERGENCY PB 31


=CAB+DM- -A41.1 MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT 81 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.3 EMERGENCY PB 32
=CAB+DM- -A41.1 MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT 86 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.3 EMERGENCY PB 33
=CAB+DM- -A41.1 MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT 91 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S21.3 EMERGENCY PB 34
=CAB+DM- -A41.2 RECTIFIER 67 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S22 OPTION : HOT PLUG 32
=CAB+DM- -A42 AXIS COMPUTER BOARD 65 =CAB+EXT-A21 -S22 OPTION : HOT PLUG 34
=CAB+DM- -F1 OPTION :AUTOMATIC FUSE 64 =CAB+DM- -T1 OPTION : TRANSFORMER UNIT 61
=CAB.PC+DM- -F2 OPTION : AUTOMATIC FUSE 62 =CAB+CM-A38.1 -Z1 CompactCom 37.1
=CAB.PC+DM- -G1 DRIVE POWER SUPPLY 62 =CAB+CM-A38.2 -Z1 CompactCom 37.1
=CAB.PC+CM- -G2 PROCESS POWER SUPPLY 25 =CAB+CM-A38.3 -Z1 CompactCom 37.1
=CAB.PC+CM- -G3 ULTRA CAP 25 =CAB+CM-A33.1 -Z1 PCI BUS 38.1
=CAB.PC+CM- -G6 OPTION : DEVICENET POWER SUPPLY 26 =CAB+DM- -Z1 MAINS LINE FILTER 64
=CAB+DM- -H1 STATUS DIOD 64
=CAB+CM- -I/Ox DIG. PART OF COMBI I/O AND DIG. I/O UNIT 43
=CAB+CM- -I/Ox DIGITAL I/O UNIT 44
=CAB+CM- -I/Ox COMBI I/O UNIT 45
=CAB+CM- -I/Ox DIG. PART OF RELAY I/O UNIT 46
=CAB+CM- -I/Ox ANALOGUE I/O UNIT 48
=CAB+CM- -I/Ox REMOTE I/O UNIT 49
=CAB+CM- -I/Ox INTERBUS SLAVE 50

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CM
Device: =CAB+CM-A21 - =CAB+DM-Z1 Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 10
Next 13
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Device list 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
Plugs overview ABB Plug overview

Plug Plug
Location Unit Connection Function text Page Location Unit Connection Function text Page
+CM -A36 -A1 DRIVE MODULE 2 42 +R1 -SMB MEASUREMENT MANIPULATOR 87
+CM -A36 -A2 DRIVE MUDULE 3 42 +R1 -SMB MEASUREMENT MANIPULATOR 92
+CM -A36 -A3 DRIVE MODULE 4 42 +R2 -SMB MEASUREMENT MANIPULATOR 77
+CM -A31 -A7 Yellow ETH_SERVICE 36 +R2 -SMB MEASUREMENT MANIPULATOR 82
+CM -A31 -A8 Green ETH_FPU 36 +CM -A31 -USB1 USB1 37
+CM -A31 -A9 Red ETH_DRIVE 36 +CM -A31 -USB2 USB2 37
+CM -A35 -CHA-J1 DEVICENET ADAPTER 40 +CM -A21 -X1 RUN CHAIN 27
+CM -A35 -CHB-J2 DUAL DEVICENET ADAPTER 40 +CM -A31 -X1 COMPUTER UNIT 36
+R1 -CP CUSTOMER SIGNAL MANIPULATOR 84 +CM -A33.1 -X1 PROFINET X1 38.1
+R1 -CP/CS CUSTOMER POWER/SIGNAL MANIPULATOR 88 +CM -A34 -X1 MC-CONSOLE 41
+R1 -CP/CS CUSTOMER POWER/SIGNAL MANIPULATOR 93 +CM -A37 -X1 INTERBUS M/S 39
+R1 -CS CUSTOMER SIGNAL MANIPULATOR 78 +CM -A37 -X1 REMOTE OUT 39
+R1 -CS CUSTOMER SIGNAL MANIPULATOR 83 +CM -A38.1 -X1 ETHERNET /IP 37.1
+R1 -CS CUSTOMER SIGNAL MANIPULATOR 84 +CM -A38.2 -X1 PROIBUS 37.1
+CM -DP1 DUAL PRESS 35 +CM -A38.3 -X1 PROFINET I/O 37.1
+EXT -A21 -DP1 DUAL PRESS 31 +CM -A39 -X1 OPTION: SERIE CONVERTER 37
+EXT -A21 -DP1 DUAL PRESS 32 +DM -A41.1 -X1 Axis computer 65
+EXT -A21 -DP1 DUAL PRESS 33 +DM -A42 -X1 Drive power supply 65
+EXT -A21 -DP1 DUAL PRESS 34 +DM -A43 -X1 Panel board 63
+CM -DP2 DUAL PRESS 35 +DM -E41 -X1 FAN UNIT 68
+EXT -A21 -DP2 DUAL PRESS 31 +DM -E42 -X1 FAN UNIT 68
+EXT -A21 -DP2 DUAL PRESS 32 +DM -E43 -X1 FAN UNIT 68
+EXT -A21 -DP2 DUAL PRESS 33 +DM -G1 -X1 AC- input 62
+EXT -A21 -DP2 DUAL PRESS 34 +CM -G2 -X1 AC-INPUT 25
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

+EXT -A21 -DP3 DUAL PRESS 31 +CM -G3 -X1 ULTRA CAP 25
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

+EXT -A21 -DP3 DUAL PRESS 32 +CM -G6 -X1 DEVICENET POWER SUPPLY 26
+EXT -A21 -DP3 DUAL PRESS 33 +CM -I/Ox1 -X1 OUT PUT CH 1-8 45
+EXT -A21 -DP3 DUAL PRESS 34 +CM -I/Ox2 -X1 OUT PUT 1-8 44
+EXT -A21 -DP4 DUAL PRESS 31 +CM -RELAY I/O1 -X1 RELAY I/O UNIT 47
+EXT -A21 -DP4 DUAL PRESS 32 +CM -A21 -X2 RUN CHAIN 27
+EXT -A21 -DP4 DUAL PRESS 33 +EXT -A22 -X2 ADAPTER 31
+EXT -A21 -DP4 DUAL PRESS 34 +EXT -A22 -X2 ADAPTER 32
+CM -A33 -DP-M-X3 PROFIBUS MASTER 38 +EXT -A22 -X2 ADAPTER 33
+CM -A33 -DP-S-X2 PROFIBUS SLAVE 38 +EXT -A22 -X2 ADAPTER 34
+DM -E1.XP1 FAN UNIT 68 +CM -A33.1 -X2 PROFINET X2 38.1
+CM -A37 -FO1 REMOTE IN 39 +CM -A34 -X2 COM1 RS232 41
+CM -A37 -FO2 REMOTE OUT 39 +CM -A37 -X2 INTERBUS SLAVE PART 39
+CM -A37 -FO3 REMOTE 39 +CM -A37 -X2 REMOTE 39
+R1 -H1 EXT.LAMP MANIPULATOR 77 +CM -A39 -X2 OPTION: SERIE CONVERTER 37
+R1 -H1 EXT. LAMP MANIPULATOR 82 +DM -A41.1 -X2 Rectifier 67
+CM -A31 -J2 COM1 37 +DM -A42 -X2 Computer RCC 65
+CM -A31 -J2 MC CONSOLE 37 +DM -G1 -X2 DC- output 62
+CM -A31 -J21 MAIN COMPUTER 36 +CM -G2 -X2 24V SYS 24V COOL 25
+CM -A31 -LAN1 MAIN COMPUTER 37 +CM -G6 -X2 DEVICENET POWER SUPPLY 26
+CM -A33.1 -LAN1 PROFINET LAN1 38.1 +CM -I/Ox2 -X2 OUT PUT 9-16 44
+R1 -MP MANIPULATOR POWER 86 +DM -T1 -X2 TRANSFORMER UNIT 61
+R1 -MP MANIPULATOR POWER 91 +CM -A21 -X3 GENERAL IN 28
+R1 -MP 1-3 MANIPULATOR POWER 76 +CM -A33.1 -X3 PROFINET X3 38.1
+R1 -MP 1-3 MANIPULATOR POWER 81 +CM -A37 -X3 RS232 39
+R1 -MP 4-6 MANIPULATOR POWER 76 +DM -A41.1 -X3 MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT 65
+R1 -MP 4-6 MANIPULATOR POWER 81 +DM -A43 -X3 Contactor connector 64
+EXT -A21 -S21.1.X1 2 MODE SELECTOR EXT 31 +DM -G1 -X3 DC- output 62
+EXT -A21 -S21.1.X1 2 MODE SELECTOR EXT 32 +CM -G2 -X3 24V PC 25
+EXT -A21 -S21.1.X1 3 MODE SELECTOR EXT 33 +CM -I/Ox1 -X3 COMBO I/O AND DIG. I/O 43
+EXT -A21 -S21.1.X1 3 MODE SELECTOR EXT 34 +CM -I/Ox1 -X3 DIGITAL I/O UNIT 46

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CM
PLUGS OVERVIEW Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 13
Next 14
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Plugs overview 03 Total 69
Plugs overview ABB Plug overview

Plug Plug
Location Unit Connection Function text Page Location Unit Connection Function text Page
+CM -I/Ox1 -X3 INTERBUS SLAVE 50 +CM -A21 -X14 RUN CHAIN 1 30
+CM -I/Ox1 -X3 EXTERNAL SUPPLY 51 +CM -A21 -X15 PANEL BOARD 28
+CM -A21 -X4 GENERAL OUT 28 +CM -A21 -X17 RUN CHAIN 1 30
+CM -A37 -X4 24V DC 39 +DM -A41.1 -X17 Main servo drive unit power supply 76
+DM -A42 -X4 Measurement 1 66 +DM -A41.1 -X17 Main servo drive power connector 81
+DM -A43 -X4 Axis computer connector 63 +DM -A41.1 -X17 Main servo drive power connector 86
+DM -G1 -X4 Digital output 62 +DM -A41.1 -X17 Main servo drive power connector 91
+CM -G2 -X4 ULTRA CAP 25 +CM -A21 -X18 PANEL BOARD 28
+CM -I/Ox1 -X4 COMBO I/O AND DIG. I/O 43 +DM -A41.1 -X18 Main servo drive unit power supply 76
+CM -A21 -X5 AUTO/GENERAL STOP 29 +DM -A41.1 -X18 Main servo drive power connector 86
+CM -A37 -X5 REMOTE IN 39 +DM -A41.1 -X18 Main servo drive power connector 91
+DM -A42 -X5 Measurement 2 66 +DM -A41.1 -X19 Main servo drive unit power supply 76
+DM -A43 -X5 PTC, 0V Brake 63 +DM -A41.1 -X19 Main servo drive power connector 81
+CM -G2 -X5 USB 25 +DM -A41.1 -X19 Main servo drive power connector 86
+CM -I/Ox1 -X5 PART OF COMBO I/O AND DIG.I/O 43 +DM -A41.1 -X19 Main servo drive power connector 91
+CM -I/Ox1 -X5 DIGITAL I/O 46 +CM -A21 -X20 RS485 28
+CM -I/Ox1 -X5 ANALOGUE I/O 48 +CM -I/Ox1 -X20 INTERBUS SLAVE 50
+CM -I/Ox1 -X5 REMOTE I/O 49 +CM -I/Ox1 -X20 PROFIBUS DP SLAVE 51
+CM -I/Ox1 -X5 INTERBUS SLAVE 50 +CM -I/Ox1 -X20 ENCODER UNIT 52
+CM -I/Ox1 -X5 PROFIBUS DP SLAVE 51 +DM -A43 -X21 Limit switch robot 63
+CM -I/Ox1 -X5 ENCODER UNIT 52 +CM -I/Ox1 -X21 INTERBUS SLAVE 50
+CM -A21 -X6 SUPERIOR STOP 29 +DM -A43 -X22 Limit switch external axes 63
+DM -A42 -X6 Contactor board 65 +DM -A43 -X23 Limit switch override 63
+DM -A43 -X6 Power for contactor unit 63 +DM -A43 -X24 PTC, Ext. customer connection 64
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

+CM -I/Ox1 -X6 COMBI I/O UNIT 45 +DM -A41.2 -X30 Communication 67
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

+CM -A21 -X7 RUN CHAIN 1 30 +DM -A41.2 -X31 Capacitor connection 67
+DM -A43 -X7 Drive power supply 63 +DM -A41.2 -X32 Power supply 67
+CM -I/Ox1 -X7 ANALOGUE I/O 48 +DM -A41.2 -X33 Bleeder connection 67
+CM -A21 -X8 RUN CHAIN 1 30 +DM -XP0 Main connector 61
+CM -A31 -X8 Blue RS485 36 +CM -XP4 OPTION : FPU-PLUG 35
+DM -A42 -X8 Process I/O 66 +DM -E1 -XS1 Fan connector 68
+DM -A43 -X8 Contactor connector 64 +CM -XS4 FLEXPENDANT 35
+CM -I/Ox1 -X8 ANALOGUE I/O 48 +EXT -A21 -XS4 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 31
+CM -I/Ox1 -X8 REMOTE I/O 49 +EXT -A21 -XS4 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 32
+CM -A21 -X9 PANEL BOARD 28 +EXT -A21 -XS4 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 33
+EXT -A21 -X9 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 31 +EXT -A21 -XS4 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 34
+EXT -A21 -X9 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 32 +DM -XS/XP40 Control cable and ext. axes 64
+EXT -A21 -X9 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 33 +DM -XT1 Robot power connector 76
+EXT -A21 -X9 EXT.CONTROL PANEL 34 +DM -XT1 Robot power connector 81
+DM -A42 -X9 Consol connector 65 +DM -XT1 Robot power connector 86
+DM -A43 -X9 Contactor connector 64 +DM -XT1 Robot power connector 91
+CM -I/Ox1 -X9 REMOTE I/O 49
+DM -X10 Connection of mains Q1/F6/Z1-T1 61
+CM -A21 -X10 PANEL BOARD 28
+EXT -A21 -X10 EXT. COTROL PANEL 31
+EXT -A21 -X10 EXT. COTROL PANEL 32
+EXT -A21 -X10 EXT. CONTROL PANEL 33
+EXT -A21 -X10 EXT. CONTROL PANEL 34
+DM -A42 -X10 Drive power supply 65
+DM -A43 -X10 Ext. fan connector 63
+CM -A21 -X11 ROBOT COMM.CARD 27
+DM -A42 -X11 Main servo drive 65
+DM -A43 -X11 Ext. fan connector 63
+CM -A21 -X12 PROCESS POWER SUPPLY 27
+DM -A43 -X12 Duty time connector 63

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL 2008-09-01
Location: + CM
PLUGS OVERVIEW Approved Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 14
Next 20
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: Plugs overview 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAIN X1
COMPUTER
PANEL
A31 PROCESS CARD
RL1 RL2 X4 X3
POWER A21
SUPPLY X12
G2 X20 X5
X7 X8

X6
X2 X15 RL3
X11 X14 X17
X18
X1
X10
RL4
X3 X9 X2

USB
X4
X5
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

ENERGY
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

BANK
G3

J21

PANEL
UNIT
X8 FAN
TPU AXC1 WRIST
E22
A8 A9 STATUS BAND
LABEL CONSOLE
DIOD ESD

LAN USB2 FIELD


MEMORY COM1 SERVICE
BUS
CARD A8 USB1 MAIN
ADAPTER
COMPUTER
A31
PCI-SLOTS

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
VIEW OF CONTROL MODULE Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 20
Next 21
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAIN SERVO
DRIVE UNIT
A41.1
X7 X2 X8 X1 X9

X3
X5 AXIS
X8
COMPUTER
BOARD
X2
A42
X9
X3 X4

X17 X18 X19 X4 X2

X33 X32
DRIVE
POWER
SUPPLY

TERMINAL XT1
RECTIFIER K44 X11
G1 X5
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

A41.2
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

X4
K43

X30 X3

K42 X10 X6

X1
X1

X7 X5 X9 X11 X6 X4

CONTACTOR
X22 UNIT
A43

X21 X3
X8

FAN
X23 UNIT
X24
E1

X1 X10 X12

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
VIEW OF DRIVE MODULE Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 21
Next 23
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Control module = CM
Location + CM
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Sublocation = SLO.1 or SLO.2 etc. shows that the sheet is a variant of the CM.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
CONTROL MODULE Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 23
Next 24
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

230V

G3 G2
Option
AC Devicenet PS
Ultra cap
G6
DC
AC
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

DC

A21 A31
Panel Computer
module
board

S21 I/Ox
Control I/O
FPU
Ethernet service
panel unit
Field bus
Drive

Drive

USB

LAN

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
BLOCK DIAGRAM Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 24
Next 25
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision:
1

-G2

Prepared by, date:


-X2
/27;2 / -24V SYS -250 AWG18

1
PROCESS POWER SUPPLY
/27;2 / -0V SYS -251 AWG18

2
2

/27;2 / -24V COOL -252 AWG18

PANEL BOARD
24V COOL
24V SYS
/27;2 / -0V COOL -253 AWG18

Approved by, date:


-X3
/36;2 / -24V PC;1 -301 AWG18
3

1
/36;2 / -24V PC;2 -302 AWG18

UNIT
AWG18
24V PC

/36;2 / -0V PC;1 -303

COMPUTER
3
/36;2 / -0V PC;2 -304 AWG18
4
-X1

-230V AC1;1 / /62;7


1

-230V AC2;1 / /62;7


5

AC -INPUT
4

-G3
-X1
-X4

+
AWG16 gnye

1
1

+
2
2

NC

Lab/Office:
3
3

NC
4
4

+
5
5
5

ULTRA CAP
6
6

-
7
7
ULTRA CAP

8
8

+Sense
9
9

NC
-
10
10

PROCESS POWER SUPPLY


6

IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL


-X5

/37;6 / -USB2 +5V AWG24


1

2/RD

/37;6 / -USB2 D- AWG28


2

MAIN
USB

/37;6 / -USB2 D+ AWG28


3

COMPUTER
Status:
1/WH 1/GN

/37;6 / -USB2_GND AWG24


7

2/BK

Document no.
Approved
Plant: 2008-09-01
Location:

3HAC026871-005
Sublocation: +
+ CM
8

03
= CAB.PC

Total 69
Next 26
Rev. Ind Page 25
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

-G6

Latest revision:
1

Prepared by, date:


POWER
SUPPLY
OPTION :
DEVICENET

-X2
-X1
-230V AC1;1 / /62;7

AC
L

+
-230V AC2;1 / /62;7

DC

-
N
2

+
-

Approved by, date:


/43;1 / -+24Vdevicenet;2 AWG16

/43;1 / -0Vdevicenet;2
gnye

GND

/46;2 / -+24Vdevicenet;3
/46;2 / -0Vdevicenet;3
3

/48;1 / -+24Vdevicenet;4
/48;1 / -0Vdevicenet;4

/49;1 / -+24Vdevicenet;5
/49;1 / -0Vdevicenet;5

/50;2 / -+24Vdevicenet;6
/50;2 / -0Vdevicenet;6
4

/51;1 / -+24Vdevicenet;7
/51;1 / -0Vdevicenet;7

/52;1 / -+24Vdevicenet;8
/52;1 / -0Vdevicenet;8

Lab/Office:
5
6

IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL


OPTION : POWER SUPPLY DEVICENET
Status:
7

Document no.
Approved
Plant: 2008-09-01
Location:

3HAC026871-005
Sublocation: +
+ CM
8

03
= CAB.PC

Total 69
Next 27
Rev. Ind Page 26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PANEL BOARD
-A21

-X12 24V FPU POWER


/25;2 / -24V SYS 24V SYS
1 24V PANEL
/25;2 / -0V SYS 0V SYS
2

24V PANEL
/25;2 / -24V COOL
3
/25;2 / -0V COOL
4

-X1 -X10
ES1 top -ES FPU 1:A / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2

JUMPER
3 5
-X2
ES2 top -ES FPU 2:A / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
FPU

JUMPER
3 7
-ES FPU 2:B / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
8
EXTERNAL 0V 0V -ES FPU 1:B / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
EMERGENCY 24V Panel 4 24V PANEL 6
4
STOP PB

RunCh0V
RunCh+
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

Run CH1 top


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Run CH2 top 5


5
-X9
EMERGENCY ES1OUT:A -A21-X9:17 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
STOP OUTPUT 1 ES2 OUT:A 1 17 -A21-X9:18 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 EXTERNAL
1 18 -A21-X9:13 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 CONTROL
EMERGENCY ES2 OUT:B 13 -A21-X9:14 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 PANEL
STOP OUTPUT 2 ES1OUT:B 2 14 -A21-X9:11 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
EM. PB
2 11 -A21-X9:12 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
Sep ES2:A RunCh0V 12 -A21-X9:15 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
Sep ES1:A 9 RunCh+ 15 -A21-X9:16 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
9 -ES2 16
-ES1
JUMPER
JUMPER

U U

Sep ES1:B
10
Sep ES2:B
10
ES2 bottom
EXTERNAL ES1 bottom AWG24
JUMPER
JUMPER

7
-X11
SUPPLY 0V 7
24V Panel 8 1
8 2 WHGN -24V_Sig.ref. / /36;7
SOFT_ESO
24V PANEL 3 BU -RS485+ / /36;7
SOFT_ESI 4 WHBU -RS485- / /36;7 MAIN
0V 5 COMPUTER
6 WHBN -0V_Sig.ref. / /36;7
ES1:int 7
EMERGENCY STOP

/29;6 / -RunCh+
/29;5 / -RunCh_0V
/29;6 / -RCH2
/29;7 / -RCH1
6 8
RELAY SIGNALS ES2:int
6 ES1 ES2

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
EMERGENCY STOP Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 27
Next 28
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PANEL BOARD
-A21
X3 and X4 -X10
only in DSQC 630 24V SYS 24V FPU POWER -24V FPU POWER / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
24V PANEL 1
-X3
General in1 0V SYS -0V PANELB / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
1 General in2 2
2 General in3 -EN1_1 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2 FPU
3 General in4 3
4 General in5 -EN1_2 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
5 General in6 4
6 General in7 -FPU START / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
7 General in8 9
8 0V
9 +24V
10
-X6
EN1_1A
-X4
General out1 7 EN1_1B EXTERNAL
1 General out2 8 EN2_1B ENABLE DEVICE
2 General out3 9 EN2_1A
3 General out4 10
4 General out5 -X9
5 General out6 -A21-X9:8 / /33;2 /34;2
6 General out7 8 -A21-X9:7 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
7 General out8 7 -A21-X9:6 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

-A21-X9:4 / /33;2 /34;2


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

8 0V 6
9 4 -A21-X9:3 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
3 -A21-X9:2 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
2 EXTERNAL
CONTROL
-X20 PANEL
MODE
1 >1
2 RS485+ SELECTOR
4 RS485-
5 24V DC -A21-X9:1 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
3 1 -A21-X9:5 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
6 0V 5
7
8

/29;5 / -EN1
/29;5 / -EN2
/29;5 / -MAN1
/29;4 / -MAN2
/30;3 / -SPEED
-A21-X9:10 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 EXTERNAL
10 -A21-X9:9 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 CONTROL
9
PANEL
-A21-X9:19 / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2
MOTOR ON PB
19

24V PANEL
-X15
OP_COM
OP_MAN 1 -X18
3 24V COOL
2 EXTERNAL
OP_AUTO TACHO COMPUTER
OP_MAN_FS 2 3
FAN
4
FAN 0V
1

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RUN CHAIN Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 28
Next 29
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PANEL BOARD
-A21
24V SYS 24V FPU POWER
24V PANEL
0V SYS

-RunCh_0V / /27;5

-RunCh+ / /27;5
-MAN2 / /28;4

-MAN1 / /28;4

-RCH2 / /27;6

-RCH1 / /27;6
24V PANEL
-X5
24V PANEL

-EN2 / /28;4
-EN1 / /28;4
JUMPER
JUMPER 12 24V PANEL
JUMPER 6 0V
JUMPER 7 0V
1
-X5
AS1+
11 AS1
AUTO AS1
STOP &
AS1-
AS2+ 9 AS2 SOFT AS
5
AS2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

AS2-
GS1+ 3 GS1
10
GS1
GENERAL &
STOP
GS1- SOFT GS
GS2+ 8 GS2 CH2 CH1
4
GS2

GS2-
2

-X6
JUMPER 24V PANEL
JUMPER 6 0V
1

/30;4 / -RCH2

/30;4 / -RCH1
SS1+ SS1
4

/30;3 / -ENABLE2_1
/30;3 / -ENABLE2_2
/30;3 / -ENABLE2_3
/30;3 / -ENABLE2_4
SUPERIOR SS1
STOP

SS1- SOFT SS
SS2+ 2 SS2
5
SS2

SS2-
3

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
EMERGENCY STOP Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 29
Next 30
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTROL
PANEL BOARD
MODULE
-A21

/29;7 / -RCH1

/29;6 / -RCH2
-X7
RUN CH1 -RUN_CH1 / /63;2
0V 1 RUN CH1Ret -RUN_CH1Ret / /63;2
2
RUN CH2Ret -RUN_CH2Ret / /63;2 Drive
24V PANEL 4 RUN CH2 -RUN_CH2 / /63;2 module1
/28;4 / -SPEED 3 SPEED -SPEED / /63;2 A43.X1
5 0V -0V / /63;2
/29;5 / -ENABLE2_1 6 ENABLE2_1 -ENABLE2_1 / /63;2
7 ENABLE2_1Ret -ENABLE2_1Ret / /63;2
/29;5 / -ENABLE2_2 8 AC_ON1
9 0V
/29;5 / -ENABLE2_3 10

/29;5 / -ENABLE2_4
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

-X8
RUN CH1
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

0V 1 RUN CH1Ret
2
RUN CH2Ret
24V PANEL 4 RUN CH2 BU
3 SPEED
5 0V if not used Drive
6 ENABLE2_2 module2
7 ENABLE2_2Ret BU
A43.X1
8 AC_ON1 if not used
9 0V
10

-X14
RUN CH1
0V 1 RUN CH1Ret
2
RUN CH2Ret
24V PANEL 4 RUN CH2 BU
3 SPEED Drive
5 0V if not used module3
6 ENABLE2_3
A43.X1
7 ENABLE2_3Ret BU
8 AC_ON1 if not used
9 0V
10

-X17
RUN CH1
0V 1 RUN CH1Ret
2
RUN CH2Ret
24V PANEL 4 RUN CH2 BU
3 SPEED Drive
5 0V if not used module4
6 ENABLE2_4
A43.X1
7 ENABLE2_4Ret BU
8 AC_ON1 if not used
9 0V
10

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RUN CHAIN Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 30
Next 31
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTROL
MODULE
EXT.CONTROL PANEL
+EXT-A21
-X9 -S21.1.X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:3 -222 AWG20 -241 EXT.AUTO1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:2 3 -221 AWG20 -240 EXT.MAN1 7
/28;6 / -A21-X9:7 2 -226 AWG20 -245 EXT.AUTO2 6
/28;6 / -A21-X9:6 7 -225 AWG20 -244 EXT.MAN2 3
6 2
2-MODE SELECTOR

-S21.1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 OPTION

2 6 10 14

/28;6 / -A21-X9:5 -224 AWG20 -246 EXT.COMMON2


/28;6 / -A21-X9:1 5 -220 AWG20 -242 EXT.COMMON1 4
1 8
PANEL
MOTOR ON PB
BOARD -S21.2
A21-X9
/28;6 / -A21-X9:10 -229 AWG20 14 13
10
/28;6 / -A21-X9:19 -230 AWG20 X2 X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:9 19 -228 AWG20
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

EMERGENCY PB
-S21.3
/27;6 / -A21-X9:17 -501 -237 ES panel 1:A 21 22
/27;6 / -A21-X9:18 -502 17 -238 ES panel 1:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:13 -498 18 -233 ES panel 2:A 11 12
/27;6 / -A21-X9:14 -499 13 -234 ES panel 2:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:11 14 -231 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:12 11 -232 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:15 12 -235 ES panel 1:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:16 15 -236 ES panel 1:B
16
1 1

2 2
2 2

1 1 -X10 -XS4
/28;6 / -24V FPU POWER BN/BK 24V TPU -205 24V FPU_POWER
/28;6 / -0V PANELB BN/RD 0V 1 -206 0V 1
/28;6 / -EN1_1 BN/OG EN1 2 -207 EN 1_1 2
PANEL /28;6 / -EN1_2 BN/YE EN2 3 -208 EN 1_2 7

BOARD /27;6 / -ES FPU 1:A -496 4 -209 ES FPU 1:A 17


/27;7 / -ES FPU 1:B -500 5 -210 ES FPU 1:B 3
A21-X10
/27;6 / -ES FPU 2:A -495 6 -211 ES FPU 2:A 4 FPU
/27;7 / -ES FPU 2:B -497 7 -212 ES FPU 2:B 5
/28;6 / -FPU START BN/GN TPU_START 8 -213 FPU_START 6
9 0V 11
EN2 8
12
-A22 ADAPTER -A32.A8
MAIN /36;6 / -TD+ AWG24 OG TD+ -X2 TD+
COMPUTER /36;6 / -TD- WHOG TD- 1 TD- 13

A31-A8 /36;6 / -RD+ GN RD+ 2 RD+ 14


/36;6 / -RD- WHGN RD- 3 RD- 15
6 16

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.2
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 31
MODE SELECTOR, 2 MODES
Next 32
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTROL
MODULE
EXT.CONTROL PANEL
+EXT-A21
-X9 -S21.1.X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:3 -222 AWG20 -241 EXT.AUTO1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:2 3 -221 AWG20 -240 EXT.MAN1 7
/28;6 / -A21-X9:7 2 -226 AWG20 -245 EXT.AUTO2 6
/28;6 / -A21-X9:6 7 -225 AWG20 -244 EXT.MAN2 3
6 2
2-MODE SELECTOR

-S21.1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 OPTION

2 6 10 14

/28;6 / -A21-X9:5 -224 AWG20 -246 EXT.COMMON2


/28;6 / -A21-X9:1 5 -220 AWG20 -242 EXT.COMMON1 4
1 8
PANEL
MOTOR ON PB
BOARD -S21.2
A21-X9
/28;6 / -A21-X9:10 -229 AWG20 14 13
10
/28;6 / -A21-X9:19 -230 AWG20 X2 X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:9 19 -228 AWG20
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

EMERGENCY PB
-S21.3
/27;6 / -A21-X9:17 -501 -237 ES panel 1:A 21 22
/27;6 / -A21-X9:18 -502 17 -238 ES panel 1:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:13 -498 18 -233 ES panel 2:A 11 12
/27;6 / -A21-X9:14 -499 13 -234 ES panel 2:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:11 14 -231 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:12 11 -232 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:15 12 -235 ES panel 1:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:16 15 -236 ES panel 1:B
16
1 1
-S22
2 2 64 63 X1 X2
2 2
14 13
1 1 -X10 53 54
-XS4
/28;6 / -24V FPU POWER BN/BK 24V TPU -205 24V FPU_POWER
/28;6 / -0V PANELB BN/RD 0V 1 -206 0V 1
/28;6 / -EN1_1 BN/OG EN1 2 -207 22 21 -214 EN 1_1 2
PANEL /28;6 / -EN1_2 BN/YE EN2 3 -208 42 41 -215 EN 1_2 7

BOARD /27;6 / -ES FPU 1:A -496 4 -209 -216 ES FPU 1:A 17
/27;7 / -ES FPU 1:B -500 5 -210 -217 ES FPU 1:B 3
A21-X10
/27;6 / -ES FPU 2:A -495 6 -211 -218 ES FPU 2:A 4 FPU
/27;7 / -ES FPU 2:B -497 7 -212 -219 ES FPU 2:B 5
/28;6 / -FPU START BN/GN TPU_START 8 -213 FPU_START 6
9 0V 11
EN2 8
12
-A22 ADAPTER -A32.A8
MAIN /36;6 / -TD+ AWG24 OG TD+ -X2 TD+
COMPUTER /36;6 / -TD- WHOG TD- 1 TD- 13

A31-A8 /36;6 / -RD+ GN RD+ 2 RD+ 14


/36;6 / -RD- WHGN RD- 3 RD- 15
6 16

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.3
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 32
MODE SELECTOR, 2 MODES
Next 33
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: OPTION : HOT PLUG 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTROL
MODULE
EXT.CONTROL PANEL
+EXT-A21
-X9 -S21.1.X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:8 -227 AWG20 -245 EXT.AUTO2
/28;6 / -A21-X9:7 8 -226 AWG20 -244 EXT.MAN2 3
/28;6 / -A21-X9:6 7 -225 AWG20 -243 EXT MAN FS2 2
/28;6 / -A21-X9:4 6 -223 AWG20 -241 EXT.AUTO1 1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:3 4 -222 AWG20 -240 EXT.MAN1 7
/28;6 / -A21-X9:2 3 -221 AWG20 -239 EXT MAN FS1 6
2 5
3-MODE SELECTOR
-S21.1
6 12 10 2 4 8 18 22 24 14 16 20 OPTION

5 1 17 13

/28;6 / -A21-X9:1 -220 AWG20 -242 EXT.COMMON1


PANEL /28;6 / -A21-X9:5 1 -224 AWG20 -246 EXT.COMMON2 8

BOARD 5 4
MOTOR ON PB
A21-X9 -S21.2

/28;6 / -A21-X9:10 -229 AWG20 14 13


10
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/28;6 / -A21-X9:19 -230


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

AWG20 X2 X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:9 19 -228 AWG20
9
EMERGENCY PB
-S21.3
/27;6 / -A21-X9:17 -501 -237 ES panel 1:A 21 22
/27;6 / -A21-X9:18 -502 17 -238 ES panel 1:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:13 -498 18 -233 ES panel 2:A 11 12
/27;6 / -A21-X9:14 -499 13 -234 ES panel 2:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:11 14 -231 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:12 11 -232 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:15 12 -235 ES panel 1:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:16 15 -236 ES panel 1:B
16
1 1

2 2
2 2

1 1 -X10 -XS4
/28;6 / -24V FPU POWER BN/BK 24V TPU -205 24V TPU_POWER
/28;6 / -0V PANELB BN/RD 0V 1 -206 0V 1
/28;6 / -EN1_1 BN/OG EN1_1 2 -207 EN 1_1 2
PANEL /28;6 / -EN1_2 BN/YE EN1_2 3 -208 EN 1_2 7

BOARD /27;6 / -ES FPU 1:A -496 4 -209 ES TP 1:A 17


/27;7 / -ES FPU 1:B -500 5 -210 ES TP 1:B 3
A21-X10
/27;6 / -ES FPU 2:A -495 6 -211 ES TP 2:A 4
/27;7 / -ES FPU 2:B -497 7 -212 ES TP 2:B 5
/28;6 / -FPU START BN/GN TPU_START 8 -213 TPU_START 6 FPU
9 0V 11
EN2 8
12
-A22 ADAPTER -A32.A8
TD+
MAIN /36;6 / -TD+ AWG24 OG TD+ -X2 TD- 13

COMPUTER /36;6 / -TD- WHOG TD- 1 RD+ 14

A31-A8 /36;6 / -RD+ GN RD+ 2 RD- 15


/36;6 / -RD- WHGN RD- 3 16
6

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.4
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 33
MODE SELECTOR, 3 MODES
Next 34
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTROL
MODULE
EXT.CONTROL PANEL
+EXT-A21
-X9 -S21.1.X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:8 -227 AWG20 -245 EXT.AUTO2
/28;6 / -A21-X9:7 8 -226 AWG20 -244 EXT.MAN2 3
/28;6 / -A21-X9:6 7 -225 AWG20 -243 EXT MAN FS2 2
/28;6 / -A21-X9:4 6 -223 AWG20 -241 EXT.AUTO1 1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:3 4 -222 AWG20 -240 EXT.MAN1 7
/28;6 / -A21-X9:2 3 -221 AWG20 -239 EXT MAN FS1 6
2 5
3-MODE SELECTOR
-S21.1
6 12 10 2 4 8 18 22 24 14 16 20 OPTION

5 1 17 13

/28;6 / -A21-X9:1 -220 AWG20 -242 EXT.COMMON1


PANEL /28;6 / -A21-X9:5 1 -224 AWG20 -246 EXT.COMMON2 8

BOARD 5 4
MOTOR ON PB
A21-X9 -S21.2

/28;6 / -A21-X9:10 -229 AWG20 14 13


10
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/28;6 / -A21-X9:19 -230


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

AWG20 X2 X1
/28;6 / -A21-X9:9 19 -228 AWG20
9
EMERGENCY PB
-S21.3
/27;6 / -A21-X9:17 -501 -237 ES panel 1:A 21 22
/27;6 / -A21-X9:18 -502 17 -238 ES panel 1:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:13 -498 18 -233 ES panel 2:A 11 12
/27;6 / -A21-X9:14 -499 13 -234 ES panel 2:A
/27;6 / -A21-X9:11 14 -231 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:12 11 -232 ES panel 2:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:15 12 -235 ES panel 1:B
/27;6 / -A21-X9:16 15 -236 ES panel 1:B
16
1 1
-S22
2 2 64 63 X1 X2
2 2
14 13
1 1 -X10 53 54
-XS4
/28;6 / -24V FPU POWER BN/BK 24V TPU -205 24V TPU_POWER
/28;6 / -0V PANELB BN/RD 0V 1 -206 0V 1
/28;6 / -EN1_1 BN/OG EN1_1 2 -207 22 21 -214 EN 1_1 2
PANEL /28;6 / -EN1_2 BN/YE EN1_2 3 -208 42 41 -215 EN 1_2 7

BOARD /27;6 / -ES FPU 1:A -496 4 -209 -216 ES TP 1:A 17


/27;7 / -ES FPU 1:B -500 5 -210 -217 ES TP 1:B 3
A21-X10
/27;6 / -ES FPU 2:A -495 6 -211 -218 ES TP 2:A 4
/27;7 / -ES FPU 2:B -497 7 -212 -219 ES TP 2:B 5
/28;6 / -FPU START BN/GN TPU_START 8 -213 TPU_START 6 FPU
9 0V 11
EN2 8
12
-A22 ADAPTER -A32.A8
TD+
MAIN /36;6 / -TD+ AWG24 OG TD+ -X2 TD- 13

COMPUTER /36;6 / -TD- WHOG TD- 1 RD+ 14

A31-A8 /36;6 / -RD+ GN RD+ 2 RD- 15


/36;6 / -RD- WHGN RD- 3 16
6

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RUN CHAIN EXT OPERATING Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.5
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 34
MODE SELECTOR, 3 MODES
Next 35
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: OPTION : HOT PLUG 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OPTION : FPU-PLUG
1) When external control panel connected to page 31 and 33
RunCh1
-XP4
3
RunCh0V
5

4
FLEXPENDANT
FLEXPENDANT -ETH_FPU

1)
EMERGENCY-STOP
-XS4
-FPU1-K1
/27;6 / -ES FPU 1:A
3
/27;6 / -ES FPU 2:A
5
/27;7 / -ES FPU 2:B
6
/27;7 / -ES FPU 1:B
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

4
PANEL -DP1 EN-DEVICE
/28;6 / -24V FPU POWER 2 1 1
BOARD -FPU1-K2
A21-X10
12

-DP2
/28;6 / -0V PANELB 2 1 2

8
/28;6 / -EN1_1
7
/28;6 / -EN1_2
17

/28;6 / -FPU START


11

/36;6 / -TD+ AWG24 OG


13
MAIN /36;6 / -TD- WHOG

COMPUTER 14

A31-A8 /36;6 / -RD+ GN ETH_FPU


15
/36;6 / -RD- WHGN
16

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
FPU, FLEXPENDANT Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.6
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 35
Next 36
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTROL
MODULE
MAIN COMPUTER
-A31
-A9 AWG24 WHOG -TX+ / /65;2
1 OG -TX- / /65;2 DRIVE MODULE
2 WHGN -RX+ / /65;2 AXIS COMPUTER
AXC1 3
-X1 ETH_DRIVE 4
/25;3 / -24V PC;1 5 GN -RX- / /65;2
1 6
PROCESS /25;3 / -24V PC;2 7

POWER SUPPLY 4 8
/25;3 / -0V PC;1
2
/25;3 / -0V PC;2
3

-A7
PWR LED (GREEN)
1
2
3 SERVICE
ETH_SERVICE 4 PORT
5
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

IDE LED (YELLOW)


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

6
7
8

STATUS LED (RED-GREEN)


-X8
AWG24
1
2 WHGN -24V_Sig.ref. / /27;7
3 BU -RS485+ / /27;7
PANEL UNIT 4 WHBU -RS485- / /27;7 PANEL BOARD
RS 485 5
6 WHBN -0V_Sig.ref. / /27;7
7
8

CHASSIS BLOWER
-E22
-A8
-TD+ / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
- 3
-TD- / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
M ETH_FPU 6 FLEXPENDANT
4
-J21 5 -RD+ / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
+

GND AWG24 BK 1
1 +24V RD -RD- / /31;2 /32;2 /33;2 /34;2 /35;2
2 FAN_TACH YE 2
3 7
8

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
MAIN COMPUTER Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 36
Next 37
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-A31 COMPUTER UNIT

-LAN1
OPTION: TX+ -TX+ / /38.1;6
232/422/485 SERIE CONVERTER 1 TX- -TX- / /38.1;6
-A39 2 RX+ -RX+ / /38.1;6
3 RX- -RX- / /38.1;6
-X1 -X2 COM1 6
-J2
RX- COM1_DCD
TX+ 1 1 A1 COM1_RXD
TX- 2 2 A2 COM1_TXD
3 3 A3 COM1_DTR
0V 4 4 A4 0V
5 5 A5 COM1_DSR
6 6 A6 COM1_RTS-N
OPT. EXTERNAL PWR 7 7 A7 COM1_CTS-N
RX+ 8 8 A8 COM1_RI
9 9 A9
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

-USB1
3
2
4
1

MC CONSOLE
-J2
CONSOLE_DCD
B1
CONSOLE_RXD
B2
CONSOLE_TXD
B3
CONSOLE_DTR
B4
GND -USB2
B5
CONSOLE_DSR AWG28 GN -USB2 D+ / /25;7 PROCESS
B6
CONSOLE_RTS-N 3 AWG28 WH -USB2 D- / /25;7 POWER SUPPLY
B7
CONSOLE_CTS-N 2 AWG24 BK -USB2_GND / /25;7
B8
CONSOLE_RI 4 AWG24 RD -USB2 +5V / /25;6
B9 1

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
MAIN COMPUTER Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 37
Next 37.1
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ETHERNET/IP Fieldbus adapter DSQC 669


-A38.1

-Z1
-X1
TX+
TX- 1 OPTION & HARNESS TO CUSTOMER I/O
RX+ 2
3
CompactCom 4
RX- 5
6
7
8

PROFIBUS Fieldbus adapter DSQC 667


-A38.2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

-Z1
-X1
SLAVE SHIELD
RXD/TXD-P 1
CONTROL-P 3 OPTION & HARNESS TO CUSTOMER I/O
GND 4
CompactCom +5VDC 5
RXD/TXD-N 6
8

PROFINET I/O Fieldbus adapter DSQC 688


-A38.3

-Z1
-X1
TX+
TX- 1 OPTION & HARNESS TO CUSTOMER I/O
RX+ 2
3
CompactCom 4
RX- 5
6
7
8

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
FIELDBUS ADAPTER: Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 37.1
ETHERNET/IP, PROFIBUS and
Next 38
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: PROFINET I/O 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PROFIBUS DP M/S
-A33
Customer
Connection

-X1
-DP-S-X2
SHIELD
RXD/TXD-P 1 1B
SLAVE CONTROL-P 3
PCI BUS GND 4
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

OPTION & HARNESS TO CUSTOMER I/O


+5VDC
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

5
RXD/TXD-N 6 1A
8

-DP-M-X3
SHIELD
RXD/TXD-P 1 1B
MASTER CONTROL-P 3
GND 4
+5VDC 5
RXD/TXD-N 6 1A
8

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
PROFIBUS DP M/S Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 38
Next 38.1
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PROFINET DSQC678
-A33.1

-X1
TX+
1 TX-
2 RX+
3
4
5 RX-
6
7
8

-Z1
-X2
TX+
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

TX-
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

1
2 RX+
3
PCI BUS 4
5 RX-
6
7
8

-X3
TX+
1 TX-
2 RX+
3
4
5 RX-
6
7
8

-LAN1
-TX+ / /37;6
1 -TX- / /37;6
2 -RX+ / /37;6
3
4
5 -RX- / /37;6
6
7
8

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
PROFINET Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 38.1
Next 39
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

INTERBUS M/S (OPTICAL FIBRE) INTERBUS M/S (COPPER WIRE)


-A37 -A37

-A37.1
-A37.1 1)
-X4
24V
INTERBUS SLAVEPART 24V+
INTERBUS SLAVEPART
0V
-X2 1) 0V

-Z1 24V -Z1


24V+
REMOTE IN -X5
0V DO
0V 1 DON
6 DI
2 DIN
-FO1
PCI BUS LW/BK PCI BUS 7 GNDISI
BK1(IN) 3
LW/OG
GY (OUT)

OPTION & HARNESS TO CUSTOMER I/O


-FO2 -X1

OPTION & HARNESS TO CUSTOMER I/O


REMOTE OUT
LW/BK DO
BK1(IN) 1 DON
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

LW/OG DI
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

6
GY (OUT) 2 DIN
7 GRND
3 VCCISO
5 RBST
9

-A37.2
-FO3
LW/BK
INTERBUS MASTERPART REMOTE
BK (IN)
LW/OG
GY (OUT)
-A37.2
REMOTE -X2
DO
INTERBUS MASTERPART 1 DON
6 DI
2 DIN
-X1 7 GNDIM
TXD 3 GRND
1 RXD 4 VCCIM
2 GND 5 VCC
4 RTS 8
5 CTS
6

RS232 -X3
TXD
1 RXD
2 GND
4 RTS
5 CTS
6

1) IT IS IMPORTANT THAT 24 DC EXT SUPPLY ALWAYS IS AVAILABLE


OTHERWISE THE INTERBUS CAN NOT WORK
IF THE CONTROLLER IS TURNED OFF.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
INTERBUS M/S Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 39
Next 40
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DEVICE NET ADAPTER


-A35

-CHA-J1
V-
P1 1
CAN_L
2
DRAIN BK -V- / ;6
3 BU -CAN_L / ;6
CAN_H WH -CAN_H / ;6 Digital I/O unit
4 RD -V+ / ;6
PCI BUS V+ SC -DRAIN / ;6
5
BK -V- / ;6
BU -CAN_L / ;6
WH -CAN_H / ;6 Relay I/O unit
RD -V+ / ;6
SC -DRAIN / ;6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

BK -V- / /48;1
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

BU -CAN_L / /48;1
WH -CAN_H / /48;1 Analogue I/O unit
RD -V+ / /48;1
SC -DRAIN / /48;1

BK -V- / /49;1 OPTION: HARNESS


BU -CAN_L / /49;1 TO CUSTOMER
WH -CAN_H / /49;1 Remote I/O unit EXTERNAL I/O
RD -V+ / /49;1
ONLY FOR DUAL DEVNETCARD DSQC 659 SC -DRAIN / /49;1
-CHB-J2
BK -V- / /50;2
1 BU -CAN_L / /50;2
WH -CAN_H / /50;2 Interbus slave
2 RD -V+ / /50;2
CUSTOMER OPTION BUS SC -DRAIN / /50;2
3
BK -V- / /51;1
4 BU -CAN_L / /51;1
WH -CAN_H / /51;1 Profibus DP slave
5 RD -V+ / /51;1
SC -DRAIN / /51;1

BK -V- / /52;1
BU -CAN_L / /52;1
WH -CAN_H / /52;1 Encoder unit
RD -V+ / /52;1
SC -DRAIN / /52;1

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
DEVICENET SINGLE/ DUAL ADAPTER Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 40
Next 41
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DUAL RS232 CARD


-A34

-X1
1 COM2_RXD
2 COM2_TXD
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

COM2_DTR
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

3
COM2 4 0V
RS232 5 COM2_DSR
6 COM2_RTS-N
7 COM2_CTS-N
8
X5 9

-X2
1 COM3_RXD
PCI BUS 2 COM3_TXD
3 COM3_DTR
COM3 4 0V
RS232 5 COM3_DSR
6 COM3_RTS-N
7 COM3_CTS-N
8
9

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
DUAL RS232 CARD Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 41
Next 42
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ETHERNET CARD
-A36

-A1
TX+
1 TX-
2 RX+
3 DRIVE MODULE 2 (OPTION)
4
5 RX-
X1 6
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

7
8

-A2
TX+
1 TX-
PCI BUS 2 RX+
3 DRIVE MODULE 3 (OPTION)
4
5 RX-
6
7
8

-A3
TX+
1 TX-
2 RX+
3 DRIVE MODULE 4 (OPTION)
4
5 RX-
6
7
8

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
ETHERNET CARD Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 42
Next 43
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO NEXT
I/O UNIT

2)
120 ohm
3) 2 1

/26;3 / -+24Vdevicenet;2 DIG. PART OF COMBI I/O AND DIG. I/O UNIT DSQC 651& 652
-I/Ox
/26;3 / -0Vdevicenet;2 4)

XTXX.X3
-X3
INPUT CH.1
1 2
2 3
3 4
-X5
/46;2 / -V- 4 5
/46;2 / -CAN_L 1 5 6
/46;2 / -CAN_H 2 6 7
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/46;2 / -V+ 8
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

4 7
5 8 0V
/46;2 / -DRAIN 9
0V 3 10
OR PREVIOUS NA0 6

I/O UNIT NA1 7


1) NA2 8 0V
NA3 9
NA4 10 XTXX.X4
NA5 11
-X4
12 INPUT CH.9
1 10
2 11
3 12
4 13
5 14
6 15
1) JUMPERS PLACED ACCORDING TO 7 16
THE ACTUAL NODE ADDRESS. 8 0V
9
10
2) RESISTANS 120 OHM SHALL ALWAYS
BE CONNECTED IN THE FIRST AND THE
LAST CONNECTOR IN THE CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

3) CONNECTED IN THE LAST CONNECTOR IN THE


CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

4) FOR COMBI I/O DSQC 651, 8 INPUT, NO X4.


FOR DIGITAL I/O DSQC 652, 16 INPUT, X3 AND X4.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
DIGITAL PART OF COMBI I/O AND Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 43
DIGITAL I/O UNIT
Next 44
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DIGITAL I/O UNIT DSQC 652


-I/Ox

OUTPUT CH 1-8

XTXX.X1

<1 -X1
OUTPUT CH.1
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 8
8 0V
0V 9 24V DC
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

10

OUTPUT CH 9-16
XTXX.X2

<1 -X2
OUTPUT CH.9
0V

1 10
2 11
3 12
4 13
5 14
6 15
7 16
8 0V
9 24V DC
10

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
DIGITAL I/O UNIT Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 44
Next 45
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-I/OxCOMBI I/O UNIT DSQC 651

OUTPUT CH 1-8

XTXX.X1

<1 -X1
OUTPUT CH.1
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 8
8 0V
0V 9 24V DC
10
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

-X6
INPUT CH.1
CPU INPUT CH.2 1
2

0V
3

DAC
OUTPUT CH.1
5

REF 0VA
4
OUTPUT CH.2
6

+15V
DC
0VA
DC
-15V

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
COMBI I/O UNIT Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.1
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 45
Next 46
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO NEXT
I/O UNIT

2)
120 ohm
2 1

3) DIG. PART OF RELAY I/O UNIT DSQC 653


-I/Ox
/26;3 / -+24Vdevicenet;3
XTXX.X3
/26;3 / -0Vdevicenet;3
-X3
INPUT CH.1
1 2
2 3
-X5 3 4
/43;1 / -V- 4 5
/43;1 / -CAN_L 1 5 6
/43;1 / -CAN_H 2 6 7
/43;1 / -V+ 4 7 8
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

0V
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

5 8
/43;1 / -DRAIN 9
0V 3
OR PREVIOUS NA0 6

I/O UNIT NA1 7 0V


1) NA2 8
NA3 9
NA4 10
NA5 11
12

1) JUMPERS PLACED ACCORDING TO


THE ACTUAL NODE ADDRESS.

2) RESISTANS 120 OHM SHALL ALWAYS


BE CONNECTED IN THE FIRST AND THE
LAST CONNECTOR IN THE CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

3) CONNECTED IN THE LAST CONNECTOR IN THE


CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RELAY I/O UNIT Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.2
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 46
Next 47
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RELAY I/O UNIT DSQC 653


-RELAY I/O

XTXX.X1

-X1
OUT CH.1A
1

OUT CH.1B
2

OUT CH.2A
3

OUT CH.2B
4

OUT CH.3A
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

OUT CH.3B
6

OUT CH.4A
7

OUT CH.4B
8

OUT CH.5A
9

OUT CH.5B
10

OUT CH.6A
11

OUT CH.6B
12

OUT CH.7A
13

OUT CH.7B
14

OUT CH.8A
15

OUT CH.8B
16

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
RELAY I/O UNIT Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.2
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 47
Next 48
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO NEXT
I/O UNIT

2) ANALOGUE I/O UNIT


-I/Ox
120 ohm
2 1

3)
-X7
ANOUT_1
/26;3 / -+24Vdevicenet;4 1 ANOUT_2
2 ANOUT_3
ADC MUX
/26;3 / -0Vdevicenet;4 3 ANOUT_4
4 0V
19 0V
0V 20 0V
21 0V
-X5
/40;6 / -V- 22
/40;6 / -CAN_L 1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/40;6 / -CAN_H
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

2
/40;6 / -V+ 4
5
/40;6 / -DRAIN
0V 3 REF
DAC
OR PREVIOUS NA0 6
-X8
I/O UNIT NA1 7 ANIN_1
1) NA2 8 1 ANIN_2
NA3 9 2 ANIN_3
NA4 10 3 ANIN_4
NA5 11 4
12 24V
17
18
19
20
21
0V 22
1) JUMPERS PLACED ACCORDING TO 23

THE ACTUAL NODE ADDRESS. 24 0V


25 0V
26 0V
2) RESISTANS 120 OHM SHALL ALWAYS
27 0V
BE CONNECTED IN THE FIRST AND THE 28
LAST CONNECTOR IN THE CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

3) CONNECTED IN THE LAST CONNECTOR IN THE


CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
ANALOGUE I/O UNIT Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.3
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 48
Next 49
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO NEXT
I/O UNIT

2)
120 ohm
2 1

3)

/26;3 / -+24Vdevicenet;5

/26;4 / -0Vdevicenet;5
REMOTE I/O UNIT
-I/Ox

-X5
/40;6 / -V-
/40;6 / -CAN_L 1 NAC
/40;6 / -CAN_H 2 -X8
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/40;6 / -V+ LINE 1 (BLUE)


disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

4
5 1 REMOTE I/O IN
/40;6 / -DRAIN
0V 3 LINE 2 (CLEAR)
OR PREVIOUS NA0 6 1 2

I/O UNIT NA1 7 -X9


1) NA2 8 (BLUE)
NA3 9 1 REMOTE I/O OUT
NA4 10
NA5 11 (CLEAR)
12 2

-X8
3

1
1
1) JUMPERS PLACED ACCORDING TO
THE ACTUAL NODE ADDRESS. 2
2

2) RESISTANS 120 OHM SHALL ALWAYS


BE CONNECTED IN THE FIRST AND THE -X9
4
LAST CONNECTOR IN THE CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.
4
3) CONNECTED IN THE LAST CONNECTOR IN THE
CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
REMOTE I/O UNIT Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.4
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 49
Next 50
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO NEXT
I/O UNIT

2)
120 ohm
2 1

3)

/26;4 / -+24Vdevicenet;6 INTERBUS SLAVE


-I/Ox
/26;4 / -0Vdevicenet;6

-X5
/40;6 / -V-
-X21
/40;6 / -CAN_L 1 TPDO2
/40;6 / -CAN_H 2 1 TPDI2
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/40;6 / -V+
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

4 2 GND
5 3 +5VDC IB-S OUT
/40;6 / -DRAIN 5 TPDO2-N
0V 3 6 TPDI2-N
OR PREVIOUS NA0 6 7 RBST
I/O UNIT NA1 7 9
1) NA2 8
NA3 9
NA4 10
NA5 11
12

-X20
TPDO1
1 TPDI1
2 GND IB-S IN
3 TPDO1-N
6 TPDI1-N
-X3
GND 7
4) 24V DC EXT. SUPPLY 1
+24VDC 3
5
1) JUMPERS PLACED ACCORDING TO
THE ACTUAL NODE ADDRESS.

2) RESISTANS 120 OHM SHALL ALWAYS


BE CONNECTED IN THE FIRST AND THE
LAST CONNECTOR IN THE CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

3) CONNECTED IN THE LAST CONNECTOR IN THE


CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

4) IT IS IMPORTANT THAT 24V DC EXT SUPPLY


ALWAYS IS AVAILABLE. OTHERWISE THE
INTERBUS CAN NOT WORK IF THE CONTROLLER
IS TURNED OFF.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
INTERBUS SLAVE Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.5
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 50
Next 51
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO NEXT
I/O UNIT

2)
120 ohm
2 1

PROFIBUS DP SLAVE
-I/Ox
3)

/26;4 / -+24Vdevicenet;7
Customer
/26;4 / -0Vdevicenet;7 Connection

-X5
/40;6 / -V-
-X20
/40;6 / -CAN_L 1 SHIELD
/40;6 / -CAN_H 2 1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/40;6 / -V+
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

4 RXD/TXD-P
5 3 CONTROL-P
/40;6 / -DRAIN 4 GND
0V 3 5 +5VDC
OR PREVIOUS NA0 6 6 RXD/TXD-N
I/O UNIT NA1 7 8
1) NA2 8
NA3 9
NA4 10
NA5 11
12

-X3
0V DC
External supply GND 1
+24VDC 3
5

1) JUMPERS PLACED ACCORDING TO


THE ACTUAL NODE ADDRESS.

2) RESISTANS 120 OHM SHALL ALWAYS


BE CONNECTED IN THE FIRST AND THE
LAST CONNECTOR IN THE CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

3) CONNECTED IN THE LAST CONNECTOR IN THE


CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
PROFIBUS DP SLAVE Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.6
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 51
Next 52
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TO NEXT
I/O UNIT

2)
120 ohm
2 1

ENCODER UNIT
-I/Ox
3)

/26;4 / -+24Vdevicenet;8 Encoder


Connection
/26;4 / -0Vdevicenet;8
-X20
24 VDC
1
-X5
/40;6 / -V- 0V
/40;6 / -CAN_L 1 2
/40;6 / -CAN_H 2 ENC +24V
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

/40;6 / -V+
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

4 3
5 ENC 0V
/40;6 / -DRAIN 4 Encoder
0V 3 2 1 ENC_A
OR PREVIOUS NA0 6 5
NA1 7 A
I/O UNIT ENC_B
1) NA2 8
1
6
NA3 9 +24V
NA4 10 7
NA5 11 0V Synch switch
12 2 1 8
DIGIN
A 9

2 1
1) JUMPERS PLACED ACCORDING TO
A
THE ACTUAL NODE ADDRESS.
1
2) RESISTANS 120 OHM SHALL ALWAYS
BE CONNECTED IN THE FIRST AND THE
LAST CONNECTOR IN THE CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

3) CONNECTED IN THE LAST CONNECTOR IN THE


CAN-BUS CIRCUIT.

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
ENCODER UNIT Approved
Sublocation: + SLO.7
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 52
Next 60
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Drive module + DM
Location + DM
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Sublocation SLO.1 or SLO.2 etc. shows that the sheet is a variant of the DM

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
DRIVE MODULE Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 60
Next 61
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

AWG10 GNYE

-T1

Latest revision:
1) T1.1 6kVA
1

Prepared by, date:


200V

OPTION : TRANSFORMER UNIT


220V

-X2
/62;4 / -230V AC1 230V

400V

L1-L2-L3 = 262VAC if IRB140-340, 1400-4400


/62;4 / -230V AC2 230V 440V
2

-X1

POWER SUPPLY
1) 480V
262/480VAC

Approved by, date:


MAINS CONNECTION

/64;8 / -T1_L1 500V

262/480VAC 600V
/64;8 / -T1_L2

1)
UNITS
262/480VAC
/64;8 / -T1_L3

CONTACTOR
200V

220V
3

-Q1
OPTION : MAINS SWITCH

400V
-X10
-XP0

-113 AWG10 BK -110 BK -101 AWG10 BK


2
1

1
1

440V
-114 AWG10 BK -111 BK -102 AWG10 BK
4
3

2
2

230VAC 1) 480V -115 AWG10 BK -112 BK -103 AWG10 BK

1
6
5

3
3

115VAC 500V
AWG10 GNYE
2

600V
N
3
4

200V

220V

400V

440V

Lab/Office:
1) 480V

500V

600V
5

MAINS CONNECTION
TRANSFORMER UNIT
6

IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Status:


7

Document no.
Approved
Plant: 2008-09-01
Location:

3HAC026871-005
Sublocation: +
+ DM
8

03
= CAB

Rev. Ind

Total 69
Next 62
Page 61
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision:
1

Prepared by, date:


-G1

-X2

UNIT
/65;2 / -+24V DRIVE BN

1
/65;2 / -0V DRIVE BK

AXIS COMP.
4
DRIVE POWER SUPPLY
/65;6 / -24V Drive sys -516 AWG18 BU

2
2

/65;6 / -0V Drive sys -517 AWG18 BU

DRIVE UNIT
5

MAIN SERVO

Approved by, date:


/63;2 / -+24V DRIVE;1 -463 AWG18 BU

UNIT
/63;2 / -0V DRIVE;1 -464 AWG18 BU

CONTACTOR
3

-X3
/63;2 / -+24V BRAKE;1 -465 AWG16 BU

1
/63;2 / -+24V BRAKE;2 -466 AWG16 BU

UNIT
/63;2 / -+24V COOL;1 -469 AWG16 BU
OPTION :
AUTOMATIC FUSE

3
-F2

-467 AWG16 BU

CONTACTOR
/63;2 / -0V BRAKE;1
5
/63;2 / -0V BRAKE;2 -468 AWG16 BU
-X1

6
AWG16 GNYE

-470 AWG16 BU
4

/63;2 / -0V COOL;1


7

-152 AWG16 BK -230V AC1 / /61;2


1

1
2

/68;2 / -+24V COOL;3 -510 AWG20 BU


1/BK

-153 AWG16 BK -230V AC2 / /61;2


5
3

/68;2 / -+24V COOL;2 -511 AWG20 BU

/68;2 / -0V COOL;3 -512 AWG20 BU

DRIVE UNIT
8
2/BK AWG16

MAIN SERVO
-513 AWG20 BU

Lab/Office:
/68;2 / -0V COOL;2
5

-X4

/65;2 / -+5V;1 BK
1

UNIT
/65;2 / -ACOK BN
2

POWER SUPPLY
/65;2 / -BRAKEOK RD
AXIS COMP.
3

/65;2 / -TEMPOK OG
4
-155
-154
6

IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL


AWG16 ;
AWG16 ;

Status:
7

Document no.
Approved
Plant: 2008-09-01
-230V AC2;1 / /25;4 /26;2
-230V AC1;1 / /26;2 /25;4

Location:

3HAC026871-005
Sublocation: +
+ DM
8

03
= CAB.PC
MODULE
CONTROL

Total 69
Next 63
Rev. Ind Page 62
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTACTOR UNIT DRIVE MODULE


-A43

-X6 -X5
DRIVE /62;3 / -0V DRIVE;1 PTC1 -PTC1 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
POWER 1 1

SUPPLY /62;3 / -+24V DRIVE;1


24VDrive
2 PTC1 ret -PTC1 ret / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
1 2 2
24V
-X1
/30;7 / +CM-RUN_CH1 0V BRAKE -0V BRAKE;3 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
CONTROL /30;7 / +CM-RUN_CH1Ret 1 3

MODULE /30;7 / +CM-RUN_CH2 2

A21.X7 /30;7 / +CM-RUN_CH2Ret 3 0V BRAKE -OV BRAKE;4 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
4 4

-X22
LIM2 ch1
24VDrive -X10
LIMIT LIM2 ch2 1
3
RunCh2
SWITCH 2
EXTERNAL LIM2 ch2 ret 1
LIM2 ch1 ret 4
AXIS
2 2 EXTERNAL
24VDrive
-X23 FAN
3
LIMIT 1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

OVERRIDE 3 4

4 -X11
2
1
-X21
LIMIT /77;3 /87;3 /92;3 / -A43-X21:1 LIM1 ch1
SWITCH 1 /77;3 /87;3 /92;3 / -A43-X21:3 LIM1 ch2 1 2 EXTERNAL
3 RunCh1 FAN
CONTROL
/77;3 /87;3 /92;3 / -A43-X21:4 LIM1 ch2 ret LIM2 3
CABLE
/77;3 /87;3 /92;3 / -A43-X21:2 LIM1 ch1 ret 4 LIM1
2 4

-X1
CONTROL /30;7 / -ENABLE2_1
-X12
MODULE /30;7 / -ENABLE2_1Ret 5 INTERLOCKING DUTY
A21.X7 /30;7 / -SPEED 6 1 TIME
/30;7 / -0V 7
COUNTER
8 2

PAN_CH1
24V COOL
/65;2 / -RS485+ -X4

0V COOL
BU

BRAKE CTRL
AXIS /65;2 / -RS485- WHBU 4

24V COOL
K2
COMPUTER /65;2 / -0V ENABLE2 OG 5 RunCh1 K1
/65;2 / -ENABLE2 WHOG 7
8 RunCh2

-X7

24V COOL
/62;3 / -+24V BRAKE;2

0V COOL

PAN_CH2
1
/62;4 / -0V COOL;1

0V COOL
DRIVE 2

POWER /62;4 / -+24V COOL;1


/64;4 / -LOCK1A
/64;4 / -LOCK2B

/64;3 / -SELF1
/64;4 / -SELF2

/64;1 / -0V COOL;6

/64;2 / -RCH1

3
SUPPLY
/62;3 / -+24V BRAKE;1

/64;2 / -0V COOL;6

/64;3 / -RCH2

/64;2 / -0V COOL;6

/64;2 / -BRAKE
4
/62;4 / -0V BRAKE;2
5
/62;4 / -0V BRAKE;1
6

CONTINUATION NEXT PAGE

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
CONTACTOR BOARD Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 63
Next 64
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision:
1

Prepared by, date:


-A43

-X8

-K42
-471 AWG20 BU -0V COOL;6 / /63;4

2
-472 AWG20 BU -RCH1 / /63;5

A2
A1
CONTACTOR UNIT

-K44
-473 AWG20 BU -0V COOL;6 / /63;6
2

-474 AWG20 BU -BRAKE / /63;6


5

A2
A1

Approved by, date:


-K43
-475 AWG20 BU -0V COOL;6 / /63;5
4

-476 AWG20 BU -RCH2 / /63;5


3

A2
A1
-X3

-451 AWG20 BU
24V

-452 AWG20 BU BRAKE_FB


3

1
2
6

-479 AWG20 BU 0V
5

-493 AWG20 BU -480 AWG20 BU -SELF1 / /63;4


34
33
4

-481 AWG20 BU

-H1
24V

10

STATUS DIOD
-494 AWG20 BU -482 AWG20 BU -SELF2 / /63;4
34
33
9

-483 AWG20 BU LOCK1B


3

22
21

-484 AWG20 BU -LOCK1A / /63;4


2
4

-485 AWG20 BU LOCK2A


7

22
21

-486 AWG20 BU -LOCK2B / /63;4


8

EXTCONT
&
-X24

Lab/Office:
3

0V
4
5
5

24V

PTC2
-XS/XP40
1

AWG16 BU
-EXT. LAMP
/92;3
/87;3
/82;3
/77;3

-445
1

POWER UNIT
PTC2 0V
2

-490

SERVO DISCONNECTOR
-X9

AWG16 BU BU BU AWG16 BU
-BRAKEREL1
/92;3
/87;3
/82;3
/77;3

-447 -489 -487 24V BRAKE


4
3
6

14
13
13
14

2
1

-477 AWG16 BU 24V BRAKE


2

IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL


CONTROL CABLE

-448 AWG16 BU
3

-BRAKEREL2
/92;3
/87;3
/82;3
/77;3

AWG16 BU AWG16 BU
Status:

-446 -488 BRAKE PB


4
3

22
21

-BRAKEPB
/92;3
/87;3
/82;3
/77;3
7

Document no.
Approved

AWG16 BU
2008-09-01

-449
6
5

-450 AWG16 BU
6
FUSE

Plant:
-F1
OPTION :

Location:

3HAC026871-005
AUTOMATIC

LINE
MAINS
-Z1

FILTER

Sublocation: +

/67;4 / -L12 -128 AWG16 BK -122 BK -119 BK -T1_L1 / /61;2


+ DM
8

2
1
2
1
I>

2
1
2
1

03
= CAB

Rev. Ind

/67;5 / -L22 -129 AWG16 BK -123 BK -120 BK -T1_L2 / /61;2


4
3
4
3
I>

4
3
4
3

AWG16 BK BK BK
RECTIFIER

/67;5 / -L32 -130 -124 -121 -T1_L3 / /61;3


6
5
6
5
I>

6
5
6
5

Total 69
Next 65
Page 64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AXIS COMPUTER BOARD MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT


-A42 -A41.1

-X1
DRIVE POWER /62;2 / -0V DRIVE
SUPPLY 1
/62;1 / -+24V DRIVE
2

-X11
1/BK
-X1
+FRAME RECEIVER
-X10
/62;5 / -+5V;1 BK 1 1
1 1/BN -FRAME RECEIVER
DRIVE POWER /62;5 / -ACOK BN 2 2

SUPPLY 2 2/BK +CLK RECEIVER


/62;6 / -BRAKEOK RD 6 6
3 2/RD -CLK RECEIVER
/62;6 / -TEMPOK OG 7 7
4 3/BK +DATA RECEIVER
11 11
3/OG -DATA RECEIVER
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

12 12
4/BK +FRAME TRANSMITTER
-X2
/36;7 / -TX+ 3 3
CONTROL 1 4/YE -FRAME TRANSMITTER
MODULE /36;7 / -TX- 4 4
2 5/BK +CLK TRANSMITTER
A31.A9
/36;7 / -RX+ 8 8
MAIN
3 5/GN -CLK TRANSMITTER
COMPUTER /36;7 / -RX- 9 9
6 6/BK +DATA TRANSMITTER
13 13
6/BU -DATA TRANSMITTER
14 14
7/BK GND
-X6
/63;2 / -RS485+ 5 5
4 7/VT +5V TRANCIVER SUPPLY
CONTACTOR /63;2 / -RS485- 10 10

UNIT 5 8/BK GND


/63;2 / -0V ENABLE2 15 15
7
/63;2 / -ENABLE2
8

-X3
/62;2 / -0V Drive sys
1
-X9
RXD /62;2 / -24V Drive sys
2 2
TXD
3
0V
5

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
AXIS COMPUTER UNIT Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 65
Next 66
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AXIS COMPUTER BOARD


-A42

-X4
MRCO1 WH -MRCO1 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
1

MRCO1_N BU -MRCO1_N / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3


2

MRCI1 WH -MRCI1 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3


4
-X8
GND_O2
1 MRCI1_N OG -MRCI1_N / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3 CONTROL
24V_EXT2 5 SIGNAL
2
0V WH -MRC_0V;1 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
3 6 WH -MRC_0V;2 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
IN 2
4 24V_SMB1 GN -24V_SMB1;1 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
7 BN -24V_SMB1;2 / /77;3 /82;3 /87;3 /92;3
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

5
IN 1 0V
6 3
GND_01
PROCESS I/O 7 0V
24V_EXT1 9
8
OUT 2
9

10
GND_I2
11

-X5
12 MRCO2
GND_I1 1
13 MRCO2_N
2
14 MRCI2
OUT 1 4
15 MRCI2_N EXT. AXIS
5 SIGNAL
0V
6
24V_SMB2
7
0V
3
0V
9

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
AXIS COMPUTER UNIT Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 66
Next 67
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CONTACTOR UNIT

-L12 / /64;8

-L22 / /64;8

-L32 / /64;8

AWG10 GNYE
MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT RECTIFIER
-A41.1 -A41.2 BLEEDER
-X32 1 2 3 4

-134
-X33 -132 AWG16 BK AWG16 BK
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

1
1 1
-X2 -X30
Spare 1/BK -R1.1 -R1.2
Spare 1 1/BN 1
2 2
+24V 2 2/BK 2 -135
0V 6 2/RD 6 -133 AWG16 BK AWG16 BK
DATA_TO_DRIVE 7 3/BK 7 2
DATA_TO_DRIVE_N 11 3/OG 11
ENABLE 12 4/BK 12
ENABLE_N 3 4/YE 3
IRB 140, 340 R1.1 = 22 OHM ( NO RESISTOR R1.2 )
CLK 4 6/BU 4
IRB 260, 1600, 2400 R1.1 AND R1.2 = 47 OHM
CLK_N 8 5/GN 8
DATA_TO_RECT 9 5/BK 9
DATA_TO_RECT_N 13 6/BK 13
0V 14 7/BK 14
7/VT
-X31
+5V 5 5
10 10 1

DC-BUSBAR

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
RECTIFIER AND BLEEDER Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 67
Next 68
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

-E1 OPTION : FAN UNIT


-E1.XP1
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or

-XS1 -354
/62;4 / -+24V COOL;2
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

AWG24 BU
3 3
/62;4 / -+24V COOL;3 -350 AWG24 BU
1 1
-E41 -X1 -E42 -X1 -E43 -X1
1 1 1

+
-X1 -X1
-X1
DRIVE POWER M M M
SUPPLY 2 2 2

- - -

-X1 3 -X1 3 -X1 3

/62;4 / -0V COOL;3 -351 AWG24 BU


2 2
/62;5 / -0V COOL;2 -355 AWG24 BU
4 4

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
OPTION : FAN UNIT Approved
Sublocation: +
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 68
Next 75
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IRB140 cabinet module


Sublocation +140
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
IRB 140 CABINET MODULE Approved
Sublocation: + 140
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 75
Next 76
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision:
1

Prepared by, date:


-A41.1

=MAN+R1-MP 1-3
-XT1
-X17

M3R BUGN -_400 AWG16 BK


1

13
13

13
M3S BURD -_402 AWG16 BK
2

14
14

17
M3T BUWH -_404 AWG16 BK
2

15
15

15
MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT

M1T BKRD -_410 AWG16 BK


4

3
16
16

Approved by, date:


M1S BKGN -_408 AWG16 BK
5

5
17
17
M1R BKBU -_406 AWG16 BK
6

1
18
18
DC-BUSBAR
3

=MAN+R1-MP 4-6
-X18

M6R BN -_418 AWG16 BK


7
7
1

6
M6S GNRD -_420 AWG16 BK
8
8
2

9
M6T GNWH -_422 AWG16 BK
9
9
3

12
M4T BNBU -_432 AWG16 BK
4

3
10
10

M4S BNBK -_430 AWG16 BK


5

2
11
11
4

M4R BU -_428 AWG16 BK


6

1
12
12

Lab/Office:
-X19

M2R BKWH -_412 AWG16 BK


1
1
1

7
M2S BK -_414 AWG16 BK
2
2
2

11
5

M2T BUBK -_416 AWG16 BK


3
3
3

IRB 140
M5T BNWH -_426 AWG16 BK
4
4
4

10

M5S BNRD -_425 AWG16 BK


5
5
5

M5R BNGN -_424 AWG16 BK


6
6
6

SERVO DRIVE SYSTEM


AWG10 GNYE
6

AWG10 GNYE
IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Status:
7

Document no.
Approved
Plant: 2008-09-01
Location:

3HAC026871-005
MANIPULATOR
DRIVE MODULE

+ DM
8

Sublocation: + 140

03
= CAB

Rev. Ind

Total 69
Next 77
Page 76
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DRIVE MANIPULATOR
MODULE

=MAN+R2-SMB
/66;7 / -MRCO1 WH SDI
/66;7 / -MRCO1_N BU 9 SDI-N
/66;7 / -MRCI1 WH 5 SDO SERIAL
/66;7 / -MRCI1_N OG 8 SDO-N MEASUREMENT
AXIS COMPUTER BOARD /66;7 / -MRC_0V;1 WH 4 0V BOARD
A42-X4 /66;7 / -MRC_0V;2 WH 3
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;1 GN 24V
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;2 BN 7
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

=MAN+R1-H1
-_433 -XT1
/64;5 AWG16 BU OG

-EXT. LAMP 19 1 =MAN+R1-MP 4-6


DRIVE MODULE /64;7 -_434 AWG16 BU OGWH

X40 -BRAKEPB 22 15
/64;6 -_435 AWG16 BU GYBK

-BRAKEREL1 20 8
/64;6 -_436 AWG16 BU GYBU

-BRAKEREL2 21 5

/63;7 / -OV BRAKE;4 -_438 AWG16 BU GYGN


26 13
CONTACTOR UNIT /63;7 / -PTC1 -_439 AWG16 BU OGBU

A43-X5 23 11
=MAN+R1-MP 1-3
/63;7 / -PTC1 ret -_440 AWG16 BU OGBK
24 2
/63;7 / -0V BRAKE;3 -_437 AWG16 BU OGRD
25 14

/63;2 / -A43-X21:2 GYWH


10
CONTACTOR UNIT /63;2 / -A43-X21:4 GYRD

A43-X21 16
/63;2 / -A43-X21:3 GY
18
/63;2 / -A43-X21:1 OGGN
12

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
CONTROL CABLE Approved
Sublocation: + 140
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 77
IRB 140
Next 78
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MANIPULATOR
IRB 140

CUSTOMER
=MAN+R1-CS
CONNECTIONS
AWG24 1/WH CSA
1
1/BU CSB
9
2/WH CSC
2
2/OG CSD
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

10
3/WH CSE
3
3/GN CSF
11
4/WH CSG
4
4/BN CSH
12
5/WH CSJ
5
5/GY CSK
13
6/RD CSL
6
6/BU CSM
14

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
CUSTOMER SIGNAL Approved
Sublocation: + 140
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 78
IRB 140
Next 80
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IRB340 and IRB360 cabinet module


Sublocation +340
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
IRB 340 AND IRB 360 Approved
Sublocation: + 340
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 80
CABINET MODULE
Next 81
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision:
1

Prepared by, date:


2

-A41.1

Approved by, date:


=MAN+R1-MP 1-3
-XT1
-X17

BKWH M2R -_400 AWG16 BK

7
7
1

9
BK M2S -_402 AWG16 BK

8
8
MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT

11
BUBK M2T -_404 AWG16 BK
3

9
9
3

7
BKRD M1T -_410 AWG16 BK
4

=MAN+R1-MP 4-6
10
10
BKGN M1S -_408 AWG16 BK
5

1
11
11
BKBU M1R -_406 AWG16 BK
6

2
12
12
4

-X19
DC-BUSBAR

BUGN M3R -_418 AWG16 BK


1
1
1

9
BURD M3S -_420 AWG16 BK
2
2
2

6
BUWH M3T -_422 AWG16 BK
3
3
3

10
BNBU M4T -_416 AWG16 BK
4
4
4

Lab/Office:
13
BNBK M4S -_414 AWG16 BK
5
5
5

17
BU M4R -_412 AWG16 BK
6
6
6

15
5

AWG10 GNYE

AWG10 GNYE

IRB 340 AND IRB 360


SERVO DRIVE UNITS
6

IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Status:


7

Document no.
Approved
DRIVE MODULE

2008-09-01
MANIPULATOR

Plant:
Location:

3HAC026871-005
+ DM
8

Sublocation: + 340

03
= CAB

Rev. Ind

Total 69
Next 82
Page 81
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DRIVE MODULE MANIPULATOR

=MAN+R2-SMB
/66;7 / -MRCO1 WH SDI
/66;7 / -MRCO1_N BU 9 SDI-N
/66;7 / -MRCI1 WH 5 SDO SERIAL
/66;7 / -MRCI1_N OG 8 SDO-N MEASUREMENT
AXIS COMPUTER BOARD /66;7 / -MRC_0V;1 WH 4 0V BOARD
A42-X4 /66;7 / -MRC_0V;2 WH 3
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;1 GN 24V
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;2 BN 7
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

=MAN+R1-H1
-_433 -XT1
/64;5 AWG16 BU GY

-EXT. LAMP 13 1
-_434 =MAN+R1-MP 4-6
/64;7 AWG16 BU GNWH
DRIVE MODULE -BRAKEPB 16 15

X40 /64;6 -_435 AWG16 BU BNGN

-BRAKEREL1 14 5
/64;6 -_436 AWG16 BU BNRD

-BRAKEREL2 15 8

/63;7 / -OV BRAKE;4 -_438 AWG16 BU BNWH


20 13
CONTACTOR UNIT /63;7 / -PTC1 -_439 AWG16 BU BN

A43-X5 17 11
-_440 =MAN+R1-MP 1-3
/63;7 / -PTC1 ret AWG16 BU GYBK
18 2
/63;7 / -0V BRAKE;3 -_437 AWG16 BU GNRD
19 14

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
CONTROL CABLE Approved
Sublocation: + 340
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 82
IRB 340 AND IRB 360
Next 83
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MANIPULATOR

Customer
Connection
=MAN+R1-CS
AWG24 1/WH CSA
A
1/BU CSB
B
2/WH CSC
C
2/OG CSD
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

D
3/WH CSE
E
3/GN CSF
F
4/WH CSG
G
4/BN CSH
H
5/WH CSJ
J
5/GY CSK
K
6/RD CSL
L
6/BU CSM
M

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
CUSTOMER SIGNAL Approved
Sublocation: + 340
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 83
IRB 340 AND IRB 360
Next 84
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MANIPULATOR
Customer
Connection =MAN+R1-CP
AWG18 BU CPA
RD 1 CPB
GN 2 CPC
YE 3 CPD
WH 4 CPE
BK 5 CPF
BN 6 CPJ
VT 8 CPK
OG 9 CPL
PK 10 CPM
11

=MAN+R1-CS
AWG24 1/WH CSA
1/BU 1 CSB
2/WH 2 CSC
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

2/OG 3 CSD
3/WH 4 CSE
3/GN 5 CSF
4/WH 6 CSG
4/BN 7 CSH
5/WH 8 CSJ
5/GY 9 CSK
6/RD 10 CSL
6/BU 11 CSM
12

7/RD CSN
7/OG 13 CSP
8/RD 14 CSR
8/GN 15 CSS
9/RD 16 CST
9/BN 17 CSU
10/RD 18 CSV
10/GY 19 CSW
11/BK 20 CSX
11/BU 21 CSY
12/BK 22 CSZ
23

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
CUSTOMER SIGNAL Approved
Sublocation: + 340
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 84
IRB 340 AND IRB 360
Next 85
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IRB1600 cabinet module


Sublocation +1600
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
IRB 1600 CABINET MODULE Approved
Sublocation: + 1600
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 85
Next 86
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision:
1

Prepared by, date:


-A41.1

=MAN+R1-MP
-XT1
-X17
M1R BKBU -_400 AWG16 BK
1

13
13

A1
M1S BKGN -_402 AWG16 BK
2

14
14

A2
MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT

M1T BKRD -_404 AWG16 BK


2

15
15

A3
M2T BUBK -_410 AWG16 BK
4

16
16

D2

Approved by, date:


M2S BK -_408 AWG16 BK
5

17
17

D1
M2R BKWH -_406 AWG16 BK
6

18
18

A4
3

-X18

M4R BU -_418 AWG16 BK

7
7
1

A10
M4S BNBK -_420 AWG16 BK

8
8
2

A9
BNBU AWG16 BK
DC-BUSBAR

M4T 9 -_422
9
3

A8
M6T GNWH -_432 AWG16 BK
4

10
10

B10
M6S GNRD -_430 AWG16 BK
5

11
11
4

D7
M6R BN -_428 AWG16 BK
6

12
12

D8

Lab/Office:
-X19

M3R BUGN -_412 AWG16 BK


1
1
1

D3
M3S BURD -_414 AWG16 BK
2
2
2

D4
5

M3T BUWH -_416 AWG16 BK


3
3
3

B1
M5T BNWH -_426 AWG16 BK

IRB 1600
4
4
4

D9

M5S BNRD -_425 AWG16 BK


5
5
5

D10

M5R BNGN -_424 AWG16 BK


6
6
6

A7

SERVO DRIVE UNIT


AWG10 GNYE
6

AWG10 GNYE
IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Status:
7

Document no.
Approved
2008-09-01
MANIPULATOR
DRIVE MODULE

Plant:
Location:

3HAC026871-005
+ DM
8

03
= CAB

Sublocation: + 1600
Rev. Ind

Total 69
Next 87
Page 86
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DRIVE MODULE MANIPULATOR

=MAN+R1-SMB
/66;7 / -MRCO1 WH SDI
/66;7 / -MRCO1_N BU A SDI-N
/66;7 / -MRCI1 WH B SDO
/66;7 / -MRCI1_N OG C SDO-N
AXIS COMPUTER BOARD /66;7 / -MRC_0V;1 WH D 0V SERIAL
A42-X4 /66;7 / -MRC_0V;2 WH E MEASUREMENT
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;1 GN 24V BOARD
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;2 BN F
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

=MAN+R1-MP
-_433 -XT1
/64;5 AWG16 BU OG

-EXT. LAMP 19 C7
/64;7 -_434 AWG16 BU OGWH
DRIVE MODULE -BRAKEPB 22 B8

X40 /64;6 -_435 AWG16 BU GYBK

-BRAKEREL1 20 C9
/64;6 -_436 AWG16 BU GYBU

-BRAKEREL2 21 C8

/63;7 / -OV BRAKE;4 -_438 AWG16 BU GYGN


26 C10
CONTACTOR UNIT /63;7 / -PTC1 -_439 AWG16 BU OGBU

A43-X5 23 B9
/63;7 / -PTC1 ret -_440 AWG16 BU OGBK
24 B2
/63;7 / -0V BRAKE;3 -_437 AWG16 BU OGRD
25 B7

/63;2 / -A43-X21:2 GYWH


B3
CONTACTOR UNIT /63;2 / -A43-X21:4 GYRD

A43-X21 B4
/63;2 / -A43-X21:3 GY
C2
/63;2 / -A43-X21:1 OGGN
C1

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
CONTROL CABLE Approved
Sublocation: + 1600
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 87
IRB 1600
Next 88
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MANIPULATOR
IRB 1600

Customer
Connection =MAN+R1-CP/CS
AWG18 BU CPA
RD A1 CPB
GN B1 CPC
YE C1 CPD
WH D1 CPE
BK A2 CPF
BN B2 CPJ
VT C2 CPK
OG D2 CPL
PK A3
TQ B3
GY C3
D3
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

AWG24 1/WH CSA


1/BU B5 CSB
2/WH C5 CSC
2/OG D5 CSD
3/WH A6 CSE
3/GN B6 CSF
4/WH C6 CSG
4/BN D6 CSH
5/WH A7 CSJ
5/GY B7 CSK
6/RD C7 CSL
6/BU D7 CSM
A8

7/RD CSN
7/OG B8 CSP
8/RD C8 CSR
8/GN D8 CSS
9/RD A9 CST
9/BN B9 CSU
10/RD C9 CSV
10/GY D9 CSW
11/BK A10 CSX
11/BU B10 CSY
12/BK C10 CSZ
D10

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
CUSTOMER POWER/SIGNAL Approved
Sublocation: + 1600
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 88
IRB 1600
Next 90
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

IRB260 and IRB2400 cabinet module


Sublocation +2400
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
IRB 2400 CABINET MODULE Approved
Sublocation: + 2400
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 90
Next 91
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

Latest revision:
1

Prepared by, date:


-A41.1

=MAN+R1-MP
-XT1
-X17
M1R BKBU -400 AWG16 BK
1

13
13

A1
M1S BKGN -402 AWG16 BK
2

14
14

A2
MAIN SERVO DRIVE UNIT

M1T BKRD -404 AWG16 BK


2

15
15

A3
M2T BUBK -410 AWG16 BK
4

16
16

D2

Approved by, date:


M2S BK -408 AWG16 BK
5

17
17

D1
M2R BKWH -406 AWG16 BK
6

18
18

A4
3

-X18

M4R BU -418 AWG16 BK

7
7
1

A10
M4S BNBK -420 AWG16 BK
8
8
2

A9
BNBU AWG16 BK
DC-BUSBAR

M4T -422
9
9
3

A8
M6T GNWH -432 AWG16 BK
4

10
10

B10
M6S GNRD -430 AWG16 BK
5

11
11
4

D7
M6R BN -428 AWG16 BK
6

12
12

D8

Lab/Office:
-X19

M3R BUGN -412 AWG16 BK


1
1
1

D3
M3S BURD -414 AWG16 BK
2
2
2

D4
5

M3T BUWH -416 AWG16 BK


3
3
3

B1
M5T BNWH -426 AWG16 BK

IRB 2400
4
4
4

D9

M5S BNRD -425 AWG16 BK


5
5
5

D10

M5R BNGN -424 AWG16 BK


6
6
6

A7

SERVO DRIVE UNIT


AWG10 GNYE
6

AWG10 GNYE
IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Status:
7

Document no.
Approved
2008-09-01
MANIPULATOR
DRIVE MODULE

Plant:
Location:

3HAC026871-005
+ DM
8

03
= CAB

Sublocation: + 2400
Rev. Ind

Total 69
Next 92
Page 91
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DRIVE MODULE MANIPULATOR

=MAN+R1-SMB
/66;7 / -MRCO1 WH SDI
/66;7 / -MRCO1_N BU A SDI-N
/66;7 / -MRCI1 WH B SDO
/66;7 / -MRCI1_N OG C SDO-N
AXIS COMPUTER BOARD /66;7 / -MRC_0V;1 WH D 0V SERIAL
A42-X4 /66;7 / -MRC_0V;2 WH E MEASUREMENT
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;1 GN 24V BOARD
/66;7 / -24V_SMB1;2 BN F
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

=MAN+R1-MP
-433 -XT1
/64;5 AWG16 BU OG
DRIVE MODULE -EXT. LAMP 19 C7

X40 /64;7 -434 AWG16 BU OGWH

-BRAKEPB 22 B8
/64;6 -435 AWG16 BU GYBK

-BRAKEREL1 20 C9
/64;6 -436 AWG16 BU GYBU

-BRAKEREL2 21 C8

/63;7 / -OV BRAKE;4 -438 AWG16 BU GYGN


26 C10
CONTACTOR UNIT /63;7 / -PTC1 -439 AWG16 BU OGBU

A43-X5 23 B9
/63;7 / -PTC1 ret -440 AWG16 BU OGBK
24 B2
/63;7 / -0V BRAKE;3 -437 AWG16 BU OGRD
25 B7

/63;2 / -A43-X21:2 GYWH


B3
CONTACTOR UNIT /63;2 / -A43-X21:4 GYRD

A43-X21 B4
/63;2 / -A43-X21:3 GY
C2
/63;2 / -A43-X21:1 OGGN
C1

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + DM
CONTROL CABLE Approved
Sublocation: + 2400
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 92
IRB 2400
Next 93
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MANIPULATOR
IRB 2400

Customer
Connection =MAN+R1-CP/CS
AWG18 BU CPA
RD A1 CPB
GN B1 CPC
YE C1 CPD
WH D1 CPE
BK A2 CPF
BN B2 CPJ
VT C2 CPK
OG D2 CPL
PK A3 CPM
TQ B3
GY C3
D3
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein.Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. © Copyright 2003 ABB

AWG24 1/WH CSA


1/BU B5 CSB
2/WH C5 CSC
2/OG D5 CSD
3/WH A6 CSE
3/GN B6 CSF
4/WH C6 CSG
4/BN D6 CSH
5/WH A7 CSJ
5/GY B7 CSK
6/RD C7 CSL
6/BU D7 CSM
A8

7/RD CSN
7/OG B8 CSP
8/RD C8 CSR
8/GN D8 CSS
9/RD A9 CST
9/BN B9 CSU
10/RD C9 CSV
10/GY D9 CSW
11/BK A10 CSX
11/BU B10 CSY
12/BK C10 CSZ
D10

Latest revision: Lab/Office: Status: 2008-09-01 Plant: = CAB


IRC5 PANEL MOUNTED CONTROL Location: + CM
CUSTOMER POWER/SIGNAL Approved
Sublocation: + 2400
Document no. Rev. Ind Page 93
IRB 2400
Next
Prepared by, date: Approved by, date: 3HAC026871-005 03 Total 69
Index

A P
additional drive module 88 panel boardt, repair 105
axis computer, repair 159 Panel Mounted Controller 31, 103
PC, connecting 62
B
Protection class 35
backup energy bank, repair 119 protective stop 22
C R
Cleaning of the IRC5 controller 99 rectifier 156
Cleaning the FlexPendant 100 rectifiers 78
Configuration of the drive system 78 Replacement of Contactor Interface Board 162
Connecting a USB memory 82 Replacement of customer I/O power supply 111
connection
FlexPendant 61 S
Connection of external safety devices 13 safety stop 22
contactor Interface Board, repair 162 Safety, service 13
Control power supply, Repair 108 safety, symbols 24
controlled stop 16 service port 62
servo drive units 78, 156
D
stop category 0 16
Drive functions 77 stop category 1 16
drive system fan, repair 165 stop connections
drive system power supply, repair 114 overview 16
Drive unit Node 80 stop modes
drive units 78 overview 16
DSQC 612 ethernet board 89 stops
E overview 16
Storage conditions 34
emergency stop 21 symbols, safety 24
ESD
damage elimination 27 U
sensitive equipment 27 uncontrolled stop 16
wrist strap connection point 27 USB ports 82
Ethernet 64
explanation, safety symbols 24 V
external operator’s panel 91 Validity and responsibility 13
external safety relay 71
W
F Weight 34
© Copyright 2007 - 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.

filters 78
FlexPendant
connecting 61
H
hardware stops 16
I
I/O units and gateways, repair 117
Inspection of controller modules 96
Installation Activities 33
Installation of I/O, Gateways and encoder units 94
IRC5 controller modules 33
M
Memory functions 81
MOTORS ON/MOTORS OFF circuit 66
Multi Move system 88
O
Operating conditions 34

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D 197


198
Index

3HAC027707-001 Revision: D
© Copyright 2007 - 2008 ABB. All rights reserved.
3HAC027707-001, Revision D, en

ABB AB
Robotics Products
S-721 68 VÄSTERÅS
SWEDEN
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 344000
Telefax: +46 (0) 21 132592

You might also like